U
HTR-6160
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f)
When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
MAST
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1
IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
2
3
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Caution-ii En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
1
2
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
L
3
4
Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
18 Before moving this unit, press SYSTEM OFF to set this
unit to the standby mode, and then disconnect the AC power
plug from the AC wall outlet.
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
5
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
–
–
–
other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
L
if you turn off this unit by SYSTEM OFF. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
6
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
7
8
9
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
Caution-iii En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening
BASIC OPERATION
Selecting the desired SCENE template to the SCENE
Displaying the current status of this unit on a video
Playing video sources
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
ADVANCED OPERATION
Setting the XM Satellite Radio
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
(at the end of this manual)
Front panel................................................................i
Remote control ....................................................... ii
List of remote control codes ................................. iii
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
A
4
SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the name
“
of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to
the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for
the information about each position of the parts.
1 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES
Features
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 110 W + 110 W
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio
based on HDMI version 1.3a (HDMI is Licensed by HDMI
Licensing, LLC.)
Center: 110 W
Surround: 110 W + 110 W
Surround back: 110 W + 110 W
– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
information capability
– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability
– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability
– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals
capability
SCENE function
◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations
◆ SCENE templates for customizing capability
◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support
component (some models only) working with the SCENE
function
– High definition digital audio format signals capability
◆ HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)
licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI
digital video) capability for monitor out
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
DOCK terminal
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such
as YBA-10, sold separately).
Digital audio decoders
◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
decoder
Other features
◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-
channel input
◆ Neural Surround decoder
◆ Component video input/output capability includes
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video
↔ component video) capability for monitor out
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability
◆ iPod controlling capability
Radio tuners
◆ FM/AM tuning capability
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner
and Home Dock, sold separately)
◆ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using
SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately)
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability
◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility
◆ Bi-amplification connection capability
◆ Sleep timer
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
❏ Remote control
❏ Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4)
❏ Optimizer microphone
❏ AM loop antenna
❏ Indoor FM antenna
2 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice
Notice
iPod™
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is
used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
A
4
• “ SPEAKERS” or “ DVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.
Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this
manual for the information about each position of the
parts.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• The symbol “☞” with page number(s) indicates the
corresponding reference page(s).
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the
most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe
level. One that lets the sound come through loud and
clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and,
most importantly, without affecting your sensitive
hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic
Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive
volume levels.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc.
Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned
by Neural Audio Corporation.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
©2006 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, “SiriusConnect”,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535
& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GETTING STARTED
Getting started
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
3
1
2
1
2
Take off the battery compartment cover.
Insert the two supplied batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3
Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
Notes
• Change all of the batteries if you notice that the operation range
of the remote control decreases.
• Do not use an old battery and a new one together.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control
code.
4 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Quick start guide
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. See pages 11 to 15 for
details of the speaker placement.
Front right
speaker
Preparation: Check the items
Prepare the following items.
Video monitor
Subwoofer
Front left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speakers ...................................x 2
❏ Center speaker ..................................x 1
❏ Surround speakers ............................x 4
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is
as follows:
Center
speaker
Surroundback
right speaker
DVD player
Surround back left
speaker
1. Two surround speakers
2. Center speaker
Surround left
speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
❏ Active subwoofer ...................................x 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cables .......................................x 7
❏ Subwoofer cable ....................................x 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player ..............................................x 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor .........................................x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable .............................................x 2
Select an RCA composite video cable.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................x 1
y
You can also connect two subwoofers to this unit. In this
case, prepare two active subwoofers and subwoofer cables.
Enjoy DVD playback!
5 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
Front speakers and center speaker
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 jack
Loosen
Insert
Tighten
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
L
R
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
DVR VCR
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
SIRIUS
XM
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
CENTER
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
AM
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
GND
FM
75Ω
UNBAL.
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
SINGLE
Speaker terminals
1
2
Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
To the front right
speaker
To the center speaker
To the front left
speaker
Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
Surround and surround back speakers
To the surround
back left speaker
To the surround
right speaker
Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)
cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker.
Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
To the surround
left speaker
To the surround
back right speaker
4
Connect the subwoofer cable to the
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack of this unit
and the input jack of the subwoofer.
3
Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
Subwoofer
AV receiver
E
VID
DOCK
1
2
3
4
PRE OUT
SINGLE
CENTER
D
S VI
D
DV
1
2
OOFER
SUBW
CK
BA
SUR.
D
UN
RRO
1
2
3
4
Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each
other.
Input jack
SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT 1 jack
Subwoofer cable
y
You can also connect another subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT 2 jack.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any
metal part of this unit.
6 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
3
Connect the video cable to the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video
input jack of your video monitor.
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack
AV receiver
Video monitor
DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack
DVD VIDEO jack
VIDEO
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
L
R
S
DVD
VIDEO
DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
DVR VCR
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
M
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
IN
R
DV
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
PONENT VIDEBO
DTV/CBL
COM
Y
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
Y
SIRIUS
XM
OUT
P
B
D
DV
P
B
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
R
P
DIGITAL INPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
CENTER
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
AM
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
GND
FM
75Ω
UNBAL.
R
C
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
SINGLE
Video input jack
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
jack
Video cable
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC
wall outlets.
4
Connect the power plug of this unit and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLETS for the power
1
Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack of this unit.
■ For further connections
•
•
•
•
Using the other kind of speaker combinations
Connecting a video monitor via various ways of the
Connecting a DVD player via various ways of the
Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video
AV receiver
M
DVD player
H
ONT (8C
FR
DIO
AU
T
OU
H
IN
SB (8C
T
OU
VCR
IN
R
DV
OUT
D/
DTV/CBL
D
DV
(REC)
D-R
D
D
6
DV
IN1
DV
CD
5
4
3
AXIAL
R
CO
recorder
SPEAKERS
CENTER
OPTICAL
SU
AL INPUT
DIGIT
A
R
ONT B/ZONE B/
FR
NCE
L
L
ZONE 2/PRESE
EXTRA SP
R
•
•
Connecting a set-top box
Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or a
Digital coaxial
audio output
jack
turntable
DVD DIGITAL
INPUT COAXIAL
jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
•
•
Connecting an external amplifier
Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-channel
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
2
Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
•
Bluetooth adapter
•
•
Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
DVD player
AV receiver
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel
VIDEO
VIDEO
DOCK
•
•
•
Connecting a FM/AM antenna
OUT
IN
DEO
R
DV
DTV/CBL
V
MPONENT
CO
D
DV
P
R
Y
A
P
B
P
R
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock
Connecting the SiriusConnect tuner
Composite
video output
jack
DVD VIDEO jack
Video cable
7 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
■ About SCENE function
Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button
Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this
unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field
program according to the SCENE template that has been
assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are
built combinations of input sources and sound field
programs.
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see
y
If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the
SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the
component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of
the DVD player for further information.
1
Turn on the video monitor and then set the
input source selector of the video monitor to
this unit.
■ The default assigned SCENE templates
Default
SCENE
button
The name of the SCENE template
and its description
S
2
Press SCENE1 button.
This unit is turned on. “DVD Viewing” appears in the
front panel display, and this unit automatically
optimize own status for the DVD playback.
DVD Viewing
– input source: DVD
SCENE
1
– sound field program: Straight
For when you want to listen to a music disc from
the connected DVD player as the background
music for this room.
Disc Listening
– input source: DVD
SCENE
2
– sound field program: 7ch Stereo
For when you want to listen to a music disc from
the connected DVD player as the background
music for this room.
TV Viewing *1
– input source: DTV/CBL
SCENE
3
– sound field program: Straight
For when you want to watch a TV program.
y
Radio Listening *2, *3, *4
– input source: TUNER
– sound field program: 7ch Enhancer
For when you want to listen to a music program
from the FM radio station.
SCENE
4
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while
this unit is in the SCENE mode.
3
4
Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
Note
J
Rotate VOLUME to adjust the volume.
*1 You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in
*2 You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this
pages 53 to 56 for tuning information.
*4 To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected
AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the
indoor FM antenna.
y
You can change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE
Note
When you change the input source or sound field program,
the SCENE mode is deactivated.
8 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick start guide
■ After using this unit...
What do you want to do with this
unit?
K
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to
the standby mode.
■ Customizing the SCENE templates
•
•
Using various SCENE templates
Creating your original SCENE templates
■ Using various input sources
•
•
•
•
Basic controls of this unit
Enjoying FM/AM radio programs
Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs
Enjoying SIRIUS Satellite Radio programs
•
•
Using your iPod with this unit
Using the Bluetooth components
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small
amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from
the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby
S
mode, press the desired SCENE buttons
■ Using various sound features
6
K
(or SCENE) or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
•
•
Using various sound field programs
H
Using the pure direct mode for high
fidelity sound
•
Customizing the sound field programs
■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit
•
Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters
•
Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit
•
•
Setting the remote control
Adjusting the advanced parameters
■ Additional feature
Automatically turning off this unit
•
9 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTIONS
Connections
Rear panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
SINGLE
CENTER
L
R
S VIDEO
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
SIRIUS
XM
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
AM
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
GND
FM
75Ω
UNBAL.
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
SINGLE
IN
OUT
8
9
0
A
B
9
TRIGGER OUT jack
Name
Page
This is control expansion jack for custom installation.
1
XM jack
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
SIRIUS jack
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
21
2
AUDIO jacks
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
ZONE2 OUT jacks
PRE OUT jacks
3
4
5
6
7
DOCK terminal
17-22
Video component jacks
(VIDEO and S VIDEO)
17-22
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
ANTENNA terminals
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Speaker terminals
HDMI jacks
8
9
0
A
B
26
11-16
18
AC OUTLETS
10 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout
7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback the sound of high definition audio formats (Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 14
for connection information.
y
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 13 for
details.
C
FL
FR
FR
SW
FL
SR
30˚
C
SL
SL
SR
SR
SL
60˚
SW
SBR
80˚
SBR
SBL
SBL
30 cm (12 in) or more
Speaker indications
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SBL/SBR: Surround back left/right
SW: Subwoofer
Front left and right speakers
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Surround back left and right speakers
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
Subwoofer(s)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity
sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. You can connect one or
two subwoofer(s) to this unit. When you use two subwoofers, you can enjoy deeper bass sound. The position of the
subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer
near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
y
When you use two subwoofers, select the same type of the subwoofer as another and set these subwoofers as same sound characteristics.
Place each subwoofer at the same distance from the listening position. The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 is the same
as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack.
11 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ 6.1-channel speaker layout
See page 14 for connection information.
■ 5.1-channel speaker layout
See page 14 for connection information.
y
y
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the
effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See
page 13 for details.
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the
effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See
page 13 for details.
FR
FR
SW
SW
FL
SR
FL
C
C
SR
SL
SW
SW
SB
SL
Speaker indications
Speaker indications
C
C
FL
FR
FL
FR
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SB: Surround back
SW: Subwoofer
FL/FR: Front left/right
C: Center
SL/SR: Surround left/right
SW: Subwoofer
30˚
30˚
60˚
SL
SL
SR
SR
SL
SL
SR
SR
60˚
80˚
80˚
SB
Front left and right speakers
Center speaker
Front left and right speakers
Center speaker
Surround left and right speakers
Subwoofer(s)
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as
those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 11).
Subwoofer(s)
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as
those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 11).
Surround left and right speakers
Surround back speaker
Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND
speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers
behind the listening position. For the smooth and
unbroken sound field behind the listening position, place
the surround left and right speakers farther back compared
with the placement in the 7.1-channel speaker layout. The
surround back channel signals are directed to the surround
left and right speakers when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to
Connect a single surround speakers to the SURROUND
BACK SINGLE speaker terminal and place the single
surround back speaker behind the listening position. The
surround back left and right channel signals are mixed
down and output at the single surround back speaker when
you set “SUR.B L/R SP” to “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see
For other speaker combinations
You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/
6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.
Use the automatic setup feature (see page 32) or set the “SPEAKER SET” parameters in “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 85) to output the surround sounds at the connected speakers.
12 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Using presence speakers
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front and surround back speakers with extra ambient effects
produced by the sound field programs (see page 48). You can adjust the vertical position of dialogues with using the
To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the EXTRA SP terminal (see page 14) and set “EXTRA SP
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
Speaker indications
FL: Front left
FR: Front right
C: Center
PL
PR
PL: Front presence left
PR: Front presence right
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
1.8 m
(6 ft) or
higher
FL
FR
C
13 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
Caution
•
•
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage
this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front
panel display when you turn on this unit.
•
•
Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 28). 4 ohm
speakers can be also used as the front speakers. For details about the speaker impedance setting, see page 106.
Note
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable
to the “–” (black) terminals.
■ For the 7.1-channel speaker setting
EXTRA SP terminals
Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), front speaker systems in another room
Subwoofers
(ZONE B), presence speakers, or Zone 2 speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected
to the EXTRA SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 85).
(optional)
y
You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals in “AUTO
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
L
R
S VIDEO
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
C
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
DVD
1
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
4
SIRIUS
XM
OUT
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
CENTER
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
FRONT
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
AM
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
GND
FM
75Ω
UNBAL.
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
SINGLE
IN
OUT
Center speaker
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Front speakers
(FRONT A)
Right
Surround speakers
Surround back speakers
14 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ For the 6.1-channel speaker setting
Center speaker
EXTRA SP terminals
(optional)
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
OUT
HDMI
Subwoofers
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
CENTER
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
TRIGGER
OUT
2V
SINGLE
5mA MAX.
Right
Left
Left (SINGLE)
Right
Left
Surround speakers
Surround back speaker
Front speakers
(FRONT A)
■ For the 5.1-channel speaker setting
Center speaker
EXTRA SP terminals
(optional)
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
DOCK
FRONT (8CH)
SINGLE
CENTER
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
OUT
HDMI
Subwoofers
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
CENTER
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
TRIGGER
OUT
2V
SINGLE
mA MAX.
Right
Left
Right
Left
Surround speakers
Front speakers
(FRONT A)
15 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting the speaker cable
■ Connecting the banana plug
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding
terminal.
10 mm (0.4 in)
2
Loosen the knob.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
■ Using bi-amplification connections
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers
to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high
pass filter) crossovers.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections
to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-
amplification.
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT
and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals as shown
below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
Front speakers
Left
Right
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
FRONT
A
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
L
R
SINGLE L
This unit
Note
When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the
shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the
instruction manuals of the speakers for details.
16 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Connect one of the type of the audio jack(s) and/or video jack(s) that your input components are equipped with.
Audio jacks and cable plugs
Video jacks and cable plugs
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
L
R
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(Yellow)
(Red)
(Blue) (Green)
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)
S
O
V
PR
PB
Y
L
R
C
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
AUDIO jacks
VIDEO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
Note
y
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. Optical input jacks are compatible
with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See
17 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Information on HDMI™
Video signals
■ HDMI signal compatibility
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the
following resolutions:
Audio signals
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
media
Video signal format
– 480i/60 Hz
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, Blu-
ray Disc, HD DVD,
etc.
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
DSD
2/5.1ch,
SA-CD, etc.
2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
Default input assignment of HDMI input jacks
Bitstream
Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
HDMI input jack
IN1
IN2
Assigned input source
DVD
DTV/CBL
Bitstream (High Dolby TrueHD,
definition audio) Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master
Blu-ray Disc,
HD DVD, etc.
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
HDMI
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio
signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the
following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 25)
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source
component, and set the component appropriately.
HDMI cable plug
y
Notes
• We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
the DVD player.
meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
Notes
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input
source component appropriately so that the component outputs
the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the
bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied
instruction manuals for details.
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to
establish the connection to the component.
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be
output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features
(for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet)
of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the
audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
18 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Audio and video signal flow
■ Audio signal flow
■ Video signal flow
Input
Output
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AUDIO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
Digital output
Analog output
Through
Notes
Notes
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks can be output at
the HDMI OUT jack only when “S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”
• When the video signals are input at the HDMI, COMPONENT
VIDEO, S VIDEO, and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the
input signals is as follows:
1. HDMI
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the
AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
2. COMPONENT VIDEO
3. S VIDEO
4. VIDEO
• Digital video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks cannot
be output from analog video output jacks.
• The analog component video signals with
480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the
S-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution
are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
19 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the
S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
• When you use the internal tuner of the TV as the input source,
connect the digital or analog audio output jacks of the TV and
digital or analog audio input jacks of this unit. Refer to
“Connecting a set-top box” on page 22 for connecting
information.
Notes
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
• If a video monitor is connected to this unit via a DVI
connection, you may not take full advantage of the HDMI
features.
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals
being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the
HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic
audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync
feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing
HDMI OUT jack of this unit to use the feature.
y
• You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or
on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT
jack of this unit. Use the “S.AUDIO” parameter in “OPTION
MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
S VIDEO
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
CENTER
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
O
Optical out
S
Y
PB
PR
HDMI in
V
Component video in
S-video in
Video in
TV (or projector)
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection, and one for the
audio connection)
20 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting other components
converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT
jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video
connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the
default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for
“OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
Notes
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks,
priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
to make the same type of video connections as those made for
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your
other components to the VIDEO jacks.
■ Connecting a DVD player
DVD player
S-video out
Optical out
Coaxial out
Video out
Component video out
Audio out
HDMI out
L
R
C
PR
PB
Y
O
V
S
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
SINGLE
CENTER
L
R
S VIDEO
DVD DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
SIRIUS
XM
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
CENTER
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AC OUTLETS
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
AM
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
GND
FM
75Ω
UNBAL.
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection, and one for the
audio connection)
21 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
S-video out
VCR
Audio out
Audio in
S-video in
Video in
Video out
R
L
R
L
V
V
S
S
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
L
R
S VIDEO
DVD DTV/CBL
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
XM
ANTENNA
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
CENTER
C
MONITOR OUT
AC OUTLETS
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
FRONT
A
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
S
S
V
V
L
R
L
R
Y
PB
PR
S-video in
Video in
Audio in
Audio out
Component video out
DVD recorder
or PVR
■ Connecting a set-top box
Satellite receiver, cable
TV receiver or HDTV
decoder
S-video out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out
Component video out
R
L
Y
PB
PR
V
O
S
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
FRONT (8CH)
PRE OUT
SINGLE
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
CENTER
L
R
S VIDEO
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
1
2
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
C
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
DVD
1
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
4
SIRIUS
XM
ANTENNA
OUT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL INPUT
SPEAKERS
MONITOR OUT
DVR
FRONT B/ZONE B/
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection, and one for the
audio connection)
22 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting audio components
Notes
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the
corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 93).
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,
the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
CD recorder, MD
recorder or tape deck
Audio out
Audio in
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
MULTI CH INPUTCENTER
PRE OU
FRONT (8CH)
L
R
IN
MD/ OUT
SUB
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
CD
(PLAY) CD-R (REC)
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER ZONE
2
FRONT SURROUND
S
OUT
HDMI
DVD
1
DTV/CBL
2
CD
3
DVD
4
DVD
IN1
DTV/CBL
IN2
SIRIUS
XM
OUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
DIGITAL INPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
FRONT B/ZONE B/
ZONE 2/PRESENCE
R
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP
L
L
R
L
R
L
AM
GND
FM
75Ω
UNBAL.
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
Coaxial
out
L
R
C
Audio
out
CD player
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the audio connection)
23 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output
or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs
the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
Notes
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 52).
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 85).
5
PRE OUT
SINGLE
CENTER
L
R
1
2
FRONT SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
1
3
2
4
1
FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
2
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
3
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks
Surround back channel output jacks. When you only
connect one external amplifier for the surround back
channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.
Notes
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front
channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks.
• The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks
differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see
4
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks
Connect one or two subwoofers with a built-in amplifier.
Note
The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 is the same
as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1 jack.
5
CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
24 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-
amplifier.
If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH” (see page 95), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
Notes
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 43), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT (8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT (8CH)
CENTER
CENTER
L
L
L
*1
R
R
R
SUB
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER
SUB
SB (8CH) SURROUND WOOFER
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
Multi-format player/External
decoder (5.1-channel output)
Multi-format player/External
decoder (7.1-channel output)
y
■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
your Bluetooth components.
dock or Bluetooth adapter
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth
adapter (such as YBA-10 sold separately). Connect a
Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the
DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its
dedicated cable.
DOCK
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
VCR
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
DTV/CBL
A
B
PR
PB
Y
PR
P
B
Y
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
Yamaha iPod universal dock
or Bluetooth adapter
25 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
When the components are the Yamaha products and have
the capability of the transmission of the remote control
signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE
OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with
the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
FM
75Ω
UNBAL.
components before making connections.
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
OUT
Notes
• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
Remote
Remote
control out
control in
VOLUME
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ZONE
2
ZONE
2
SPEAKERS
BAND
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SCENE
MEMORY
INFO
ON/OFF
CONTROL
Infrared signal
receiver or Yamaha
component
Yamaha component
(CD or DVD player,
etc.)
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
SYSTEM OFF
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO SELECT
OPTIMIZER MIC
STANDBY
/ON
SILENT CINEMA
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
y
• If the components have the capability of the SCENE control
signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding
components and start the playback when you use one of the
SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about
the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components.
• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not
the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
L
R
S
V
O
L
R
Game console or
video camera
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection, and
one for the audio connection)
26 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
Insert
Open the lever
Close the lever
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide
sufficient signal strength.
Notes
y
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity
and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND
terminal.
Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
DV
1
OPT
SIRIUS
XM
ANTENNA
F
Z
AM
GND
FM
75Ω
UNBAL.
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33
ft) vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the
antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
27 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting the power cable
Setting the speaker impedance
Caution
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm
speakers can be also used as the front speakers.
C
MONITOR OUT
DVR
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
120V 80Hz
100W MAX.TOTAL
0.8A MAX.TOTAL
L
Press SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to
turn off this unit.
1
M
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and
2
K
then press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn
on this unit.
To the AC wall outlet
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
MAIN ZONE
While holding
TONE CONTROL
down
ON/OFF
■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
Use these 2 outlets to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these 2 outlets. Power to these 2 outlets is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these 2 outlets is cut off when this unit is turned off. For
information on the maximum power or the total power
consumption of the components that can be connected to
these 2 outlets, see “Specifications” on page 124.
N
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select
3
“SP IMP.”.
“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting
(“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display.
M
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to
select “6Ω MIN”.
4
5
Note
The power to AC OUTLETS of this unit is not cut off while this
unit is charging connected iPod even when this unit is in the
standby mode. When this unit completes charging or the iPod is
disconnected, the power is cut off automatically when this unit is
in the standby mode.
L
Press SYSTEM OFF to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.
Note
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
28 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Turning this unit on and off
■ Turning on this unit
K
H
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or POWER) to
turn on this unit.
The main zone is turned on.
y
• When you turn on this unit, there will be delay for a few
seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.
S
• You can also turn on the main zone by pressing SCENE (or
6
SCENE) buttons.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
K
I
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or STANDBY
)
to set the main zone to the standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
y
L
page 104) to the standby mode simultaneously.
29 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Front panel display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MULTI CH
VCR
qEX
DIGITAL PLUS
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
YPAO MEMORY
VIRTUAL AUTO TUNED STEREO
SLEEP HOLD
XM
SIRIUS
dB
DOCK
ENHANCER
VOL.
ADAPTIVE DRC
q
MASTER AUDIO
ZONE 2
SP
AB
MUTE
qTRUE HD
q
HD
96
SILENT CINEMA
96/24
LFE
LL C R
ES 24
PL x
MATRIX DISCRETE
ft
neural
PCM DSD
SL SB SR
ms
dB
SBL
SBR
0
A
B C D E
F
G
H
I
1
7
HDMI indicator
Tuner indicators
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at the HDMI IN jacks (see page 18).
Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite
Radio, or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode (see
2
ADAPTIVE DRC indicator
8
96/24 indicator
Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control
feature is turned on (see page 89).
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
3
9
DOCK indicator
MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator
The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function
is on (see page 45).
•
Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see
The DOCK indicator also lights up when this unit is
charging the battery of the stationed iPod in the
standby mode.
Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter
(such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth
component is in the paring or the Bluetooth adapter is
searching the Bluetooth component (see page 70).
Light up while the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter is
•
•
Indicates the current volume level.
0
Input signal indicators
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) or DSD (Direct Stream Digital) digital audio
signals.
•
A
Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.
•
Note
4
ENHANCER indicator
The neural indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and
Canada models and CSII indicator is only applicable to
the U.S.A. model.
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
5
Input source indicators
B
Sound field indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
Presence sound field
Listening position
Note
The XM and SIRIUS indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A.
and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator
or SIRIUS indicator lights up only when “XM” or “SIRIUS” is
selected as the input source.
Surround left
sound field
Surround right
sound field
Surround back sound field
6
YPAO indicator
C
Headphone indicator
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 45).
30 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
D
SP A B indicators
Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Light up according to the set of front speakers activated
SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated.
SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated.
SP A B: The FRONT A and FRONT B speakers are
activated.
Remote control sensor
E
ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 104).
F
DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound
field programs are selected (see page 48).
30
30
CINEMA DSP indicator
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is
active (see page 51).
SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a
sound field program is selected (see page 51).
I
1Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
y
G
Multi-information display
To set the remote control codes for other components, see
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
Notes
H
SLEEP indicator
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
I
Input channel and speaker indicators
LFE indicator
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
LFE
LL C R
SL SB SR
Presence speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
SBL
SBR
Input channel indicators
• Indicate the channel components of the current
digital input signal.
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the
speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup
Presence speaker indicators
Light up or flash according to the setting of “EXTRA
SP ASSIGN” when this unit is in the automatic setup
“MANUAL SETUP” (see page 85).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see
page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for “SUR.B L/R
31 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM (YPAO)
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
Using AUTO SETUP
2
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
“MIC ON View OSD menu” appears in the front
panel display.
Notes
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
VIDEO AUX
OPTIMIZER MIC
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
y
• Initial settings are indicated in bold.
• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that
appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual
uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
Omni-directional
microphone
5
• Before performing operations, press AMP.
• This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker
terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment.
The following menu screen appears on the video
monitor.
AUTOꢀSETUP
1
Make sure of the following check points.
. EXTRAꢀSPꢀASSIGNꢀꢀ
>ZONE2
FRONTꢀB
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZONEꢀBꢀꢀPRESENCEꢀꢀꢀꢀ
NONEꢀ
Note
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL
START
Before starting the automatic setup, check the following
check points.
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Selectꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
[
[
❏
❏
❏
❏
Speakers are connected appropriately.
Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
This unit is selected as the video input source of
the video monitor.
The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
3
Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
❏
❏
Optimizer microphone
The crossover frequency controls of the
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
Controls of a subwoofer (example)
❏
The room is sufficiently quiet.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would
be when you are seated in your listening position. You can
use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer
microphone to the tripod (etc.).
y
If you connect two subwoofers to this unit, the volume level
of each subwoofer is set to slightly less.
32 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Notes
8
Press l / h to select the desired setting
8
for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press n.
4
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have
previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.
• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change
the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see
page 109) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “BASIC MENU”
Extra speaker assignment
EXTRA SP ASSIGN
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the
EXTRA SP terminals.
Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, ZONE B,
PRESENCE, NONE
8
Press l / h to select the desired setting of
“EQ”.
6
• When you use the alternative front speaker
Select “FRONT B”.
Parametric equalizer type EQ
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified
frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the
crucial frequency bands for the listening room and
adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to
create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can
select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment
from the following choices.
Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers
to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2
speakers by using the internal amplifier.
• When you want to use another front
speaker system in Zone B
Select “ZONE B”.
Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT
• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency
response of all speakers with higher frequencies
being all speakers to achieve more natural sound.
Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little
harsh.
• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response
of all speakers. Recommended if all of your
speakers are of similar quality.
• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response
of each speaker in accordance with the sound of
your front speakers. Recommended if your front
speakers are of much higher quality than your other
speakers.
Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the
speakers to the presence speakers.
• When you do not use the EXTRA SP
terminals
Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP
terminals.
Note
select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.
8
Press l / h to select “SETUP” and then
8
press n.
5
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO
SETUP” settings and override the previous
settings.
• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”
settings and restore the previous settings.
• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”
parameters to the initial factory settings.
33 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
8
Press n to select “START” and then press
7
9
Make sure that the following screen appears
8
8
ENTER to start the setup procedure.
and then press ENTER to display the
The following message appears in the OSD.
When this unit starts the automatic setup procedure,
loud test tones are output at the speakers.
result screen.
AUTOꢀSETUP
ꢀ
For more accurate measurements, keep quiet and
move to the wall where speakers are not around. We
recommend that you leave the listening room during
the automatic setup procedure.
Measurement Complete
Press [ENTER]
NOTICE
Loudꢀtestꢀtonesꢀare
ꢀꢀꢀoutput.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀ
AUTOꢀSETUP
Pleaseꢀkeepꢀquiet
orꢀleaveꢀtheꢀroom.
ꢀ
RESULT
SP
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
:
3/4/0.1
Pressꢀ[ENTER]
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts
the automatic setup procedure.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as
follows:
8
Press ENTER to start the automatic setup
8
procedure.
Number of speakers SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this
unit in the following order:
The following screen appears in the OSD and setup
procedure starts in 10 seconds.
Front/Back/Subwoofer
AUTOꢀSETUP
ꢀ
Speaker distance DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position in the following order:
MeasurementꢀStart
inꢀ 9ꢀseconds
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
[RETURN]:Cancel
Speaker level LVL
Displays the speaker output level in the following
order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output
level
Loud test tones are output from each speaker during
the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the
“RESULT” display appears in the OSD.
Notes
Notes
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• The signal output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 2 jack
is the same as the one output at the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT 1 jack. Therefore, even if you connect two
subwoofers, the number of the connected subwoofer is
indicated as “0.1”.
• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit
is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3
minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.
y
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing
procedure, restart from step 4.
8
Press k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.
are output.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure,
the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen
appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on
page 36.
• When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the
number of warning messages appears in the above of
“RESULT” (see page 36).
• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR
PHASE:REV” appears during the automatic procedure
and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 87) is automatically set to “REVERSE”.
34 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Notes
8
8
10 Press k and then ENTER to display the
setup results in detail.
• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may
be longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer.
AUTOꢀSETUP
• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the
same frequency to provide finer adjustments.
. RESULT
SP
:
3/4/0.1
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
>SET CANCEL
8
12 Press ENTER to return to the top
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Detail
result display.
AUTOꢀSETUP
RESULT
WIRING
ꢀ
RESULT
SP
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
:
3/4/0.1
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
[ ]
[
[
/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
13 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”
8
11 Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between
8
and “CANCEL” and then press l / h to
the setup result displays.
select “SET” or “CANCEL”.
8
Press k / n to toggle between the parameters in a
results.
AUTOꢀSETUP
ꢀ
RESULT
SP
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
(WIRING)
:
3/4/0.1
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
. >SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
Results of the speaker distance
from the listening position
(DISTANCE)
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
8
14 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
Results of the setting of each
speaker size
(SIZE)
The following screen appears. Disconnect the
optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer
microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from
direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
AUTOꢀSETUP
Results of the parametric
equalizer of each speaker
(EQ)
ꢀAUTOꢀSETUPꢀComplete
Disconnect Microphone
PRESS [ENTER]
[MENU]:Exit
Results of the speaker output level
(LEVEL)
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, use “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 80).
35 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
■ If “WARNING” appears
8
15 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the
top result display. Check the warning messages to correct
your speaker settings.
The top “SET MENU” screen appears in the OSD.
SET MENU
.
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
Note
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1
Make sure the pointer is pointing at
M
16 Press MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
y
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate
your system.
8
“WARNING” and then press ENTER to
display the detailed information about the
warning.
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates
the number of warning messages.
■ If an error screen appears
AUTOꢀSETUP
. WARNING(3)
RESULT
8
Press k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or
SP
:
3/4/0.1
DIST: 14.0/17.0ft
LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB
>SET CANCEL
8
“EXIT” and then press ENTER.
The following display is an example when “E-9:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Detail
ERROR
8
Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the warning displays.
2
. E-9:USER CANCEL
Don't operate
any function
>RETRY EXIT
WARNING
[ ]
[
[
/[ ]:Select
W-1:OUTꢀOFꢀPHASE
Reverse Channel
[ENTER]:Enter
FL
--
Choices: RETRY, EXIT
CENTER
PL
SL
PR
SR
•
Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”
SBL
SBR
procedure.
[
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
•
Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
y
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO
• When the corresponding warning message is not
applicable to a speaker, “––” is displayed instead.
• If “SWFR: TOO LOUD” or “SWFR: TOO LOW” appears
in the “W-3: LEVEL ERROR” display, adjust the volume
level of the subwoofer(s).
y
If “E-5:NOISY” appears, “PROCEED” also appears in the
choices. When you select “PROCEED”, this unit continues the
measurements and settings, but the settings may not be optimal.
8
Press ENTER to return to the top result
display.
3
36 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES
Selecting the SCENE templates
This unit is equipped with 18 preset SCENE templates for
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
AMP and then press l / h) to select the
desired template.
2
5
8
SCENE 1: DVD Viewing
SCENE 2: Disc Listening
SCENE 3: TV Viewing
SCENE 4: Radio Listening
DVD MovieꢀView
S
6
3
Press the SCENE (or SCENE) button
again to confirm the selection.
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the
SCENE button.
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.
Select the desired SCENE
template
1
or
1
Remote control
Front panel
1
Note
Assign the
SCENE
Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 41 for details.
template to the
SCENE button
SCENE template library
(Image)
Selecting the desired SCENE
template to the SCENE buttons
S
6
1
Press and hold the SCENE (or SCENE)
button for 3 seconds.
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the
front panel starts to flash, and the name of the
currently assigned SCENE template appears in the
front panel display.
3 seconds
3 seconds
1
or
1
Remote control
Front panel
1
Flashes
DVD Viewing
37 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?
Which source do you like to
play back?
Which component do you
like for playback?
Default
SCENE templates
DVD Viewing
SCENE buttons
1
DVD
Video sources
(DVD video,
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Live Viewing
DVR Viewing
Recorded video)
DVR
DVD
Music discs (CD, SA-
CD or DVD-Audio)
Disc Hi-fi Listening
Music Disc Listening
Disc Listening
2
CD Hi-fi Listening
CD Listening
CD
CD Music Listening
Radio programs
4
Radio Listening
XM Listening
TUNER (FM/AM)
XM
SIRIUS
SIRIUS Listening
iPod or Bluetooth
component
*
DOCK
Dock Listening
3
TV Viewing
TV programs
Video games
DTV/CBL
TV Sports Viewing
*
Action Game Playing
RPG Playing
V-AUX
Note
*
When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit
plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal.
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 40 for details.
38 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions
The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons in the default setting.
SCENE template
Input source
Playback mode
Straight
Features
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back general
contents on the DVD player.
DVD
DVD Viewing
1
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on
your DVD player.
DVD
MOVIE
Sci-Fi
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Live Viewing
DVR Viewing
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live
video on your DVD player.
DVD
ENTERTAINMENT
Music Video
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on
your digital video recorder.
DVR
MOVIE
Drama
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity
sound of the music discs on your DVD player.
DVD
Pure Direct
Disc Hi-fi Listening
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs
on your DVD player.
DVD
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Music Disc
Listening
*
Select this SCENE template when you play back music
sources on your DVD player as the background music.
DVD
STEREO
7ch Stereo
Disc Listening
2
*
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity
sound of the music discs on your CD player.
CD
Pure Direct
CD Hi-fi Listening
CD Listening
*
CD
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs
on your CD player.
STEREO
7ch Stereo
*
CD
Select this SCENE template when you play back music source
on your CD player as the background music.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
CD Music Listening
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio
programs.
TUNER
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Radio Listening
4
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite
Radio programs.
XM
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
XM Listening
SIRIUS Listening
Dock Listening
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy SIRIUS Satellite
Radio programs.
SIRIUS
V-AUX
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on
your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth
adapter.
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general
programs on your TV.
DTV/CBL
Straight
TV Viewing
3
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs
on your TV.
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
TV Sports Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you play action games such
as car racing and FPS games.
ENTERTAINMENT
Action Game
Action Game
Playing
Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing
games.
V-AUX
ENTERTAINMENT
Roleplaying Game
RPG Playing
*
When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE
OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.
39 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Creating your original SCENE
templates
You can create your original SCENE templates for each
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 18 SCENE
templates to create the original SCENE templates.
8
Press k / n to select the desired parameter
8
of the SCENE template and then l / h to
select the desired value of the selected
parameter.
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE
template:
3
Create an original SCENE
template
Select the desired SCENE
template
• INPUT: The input source component.
• MODE: The active sound field programs,
“Straight” or “Pure Direct” mode.
i n w g V i D e V
D
S C E N E :
6
Press the SCENE button again to confirm
the edit.
4
D
: D V I N P U T
S C E N E
i n w g V i D e V D :
SCENE template library
(Image)
y
An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE
template.
Notes
1
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
6
corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input
Assign the SCENE
template to the
SCENE button
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 41 for details.
• You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE
button, and if you create another customized SCENE template,
this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with
the new one.
• The newly created template is only available for the assigned
SCENE button.
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
6
Press and hold the desired SCENE button
for 3 seconds.
■ Rename the SCENE templates
The SCENE template customizing screen appears on
the video monitor.
Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3
8
then press ENTER.
SCENE1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
.pꢀDVDꢀViewingꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[
ꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT: ꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀMODE:ꢀꢀꢀSTRAIGHTꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
SCENE1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀRENAMEꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ-DVDꢀViewingꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:Renameꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ[SCENE1]:SETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ[RETURN]:EXITꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Character
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[p]/[[]:Positionꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[ENTER]:SETꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ[RETURN]:CANCELꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
Note
8
Press k / n to select the desired character.
8
Press l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the
space or the desired character.
•
•
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not
6
8
assigned to any of the SCENE buttons, press l / h
repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the
menu screen.
9
•
•
Press RETURN to cancel the new name.
8
Press ENTER to confirm the new name.
40 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Using the remote control for the SCENE feature
■ Controlling the input source
components in the SCENE mode
You can operate both this unit and the input source
component by using the remote control. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
■ Setting input source of the customized
SCENE template on the remote control
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control to operate the input source
component correctly.
6
Press the desired SCENE button on the
6
Press and hold the SCENE button and the
1
2
4
desired input selector button ( ) for 3 seconds.
remote control.
y
Press the desired buttons in the * area below
to control the input source component of the
selected SCENE template.
6
Press the SCENE button again to operate the input source
component.
POWER POWER
STANDBY
SIRIUS
POWER
MUTE
TV
AV
A
XM
CD
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNER
TV CH
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
B
V-AUX/DOCK
AMP
TV VOL
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
SCENE
*
1
2
3
4
SCENE buttons
BAND LEVEL
SRCH MODE
MENU
TITLE
VOLUME
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
REC
INFO
l
PROG
h
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENT
9
0
10
Note
*
These buttons control the input source component. See
page 100 for details of the function of each button.
41 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PLAYBACK
Playback
Caution
3
Start playback on the selected source
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
instructions.
tuning instructions.
Radio tuning instructions.
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to
operations.
5
Before performing the following operations, press AMP on
the remote control.
J
N
4
5
Rotate VOLUME (or press VOLUME +/–
to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
)
Basic procedure
y
• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
• You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
y
N
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or press
PROG l / h repeatedly) to select the
desired sound field program.
See page 46 to display the input source information on the
video monitor.
B
The name of the selected sound field program appears
about sound field programs.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one
2
of the input selector buttons (4)) to select
the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.
Available input sources
ꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fi
MULTI CH
VCR
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
Currently selected sound field program
ꢀ ꢀDVD
Currently selected input source
Note
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
y
The corresponding input selector button on the remote
control for the currently selected input source lights up for
approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the
remote control, showing which source component is
currently being operated.
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• To display information about the currently selected sound
42 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
5
Before performing the following operations, press AMP on
the remote control.
Selecting the front speaker set
Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT
A and/or FRONT B) on or off.
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
A
Press SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front
speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or
EXTRA SP speaker terminals.
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
source.
The active front speaker set changes as follows.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “MULTI
FRONT A
OFF
FRONT B
E
CH” (or press MULTI CH IN).
“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.
FRONT A
and
FRONT B
y
Use “MULTI CH” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
Notes
Note
• FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or
• Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front
speaker setting.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source.
■ Using the Zone B feature
When you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE B” (see
page 85), you can use the speakers connected to the
EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).
A
Press SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in
the main room are muted.
Note
If you select the sound field program and activate the Zone B
speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see
page 51).
43 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
5
Before performing the following operations, press AMP on
the remote control.
Displaying the current status of
this unit on a video monitor
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor.
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input
jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to the
same input source.
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
O
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The current status screen appears in the OSD.
y
• We recommend that you set the audio input jack select to
“AUTO” in most cases.
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 98).
STATUSꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀVOL:-40.0dB
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMOVIEꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀSci-Fiꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀINPUT:ꢀꢀꢀDVDꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀA.SEL:ꢀꢀHDMIꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
Q
F
Press AUDIO SELECT (or AUDIO SEL)
repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack
select setting.
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ[DISPLAY]:STATUSꢀOFF
y
• You can select the amount of time that the current status is
displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter
Available input sources
MULTI CH
VCR
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
O
• To turn off the status screen, press DISPLAY again.
ꢀA.SEL:ꢀAUTO
Note
The OSD signal is not output at the DVR and VCR VIDEO
OUT jacks and will not be recorded.
Currently selected audio input jack select setting
AUDIO SELECT
Function
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
AUTO
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.
HDMI
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
COAX/OPT
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL
jack
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL
jack
When no signals are input, no sound is
output.
Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
ANALOG
Note
This feature is not available when no digital input jacks
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,
HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when
the HDMI IN jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in
“INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see
page 93).
44 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
5
Before performing the following operations, press AMP on
the remote control.
Using your headphones
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
Playing video sources in the
background of an audio source
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
VOLUME
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
SPEAKERS
BAND
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SCENE
MEMORY
INFO
MUTE
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO SELECT
OPTIMIZER MIC
STANDBY
/ON
SILENT CINEMA
4
Press the input selector buttons ( ) on the
S
VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
remote control to select a video source and then
an audio source.
XM
SIRIUS
Audio sources
Video sources
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
DVD
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
y
V-AUX/DOCK
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 51).
Notes
DVD
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
Video sources
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
V-AUX/DOCK
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
MULTI CH IN
9
Audio sources
Muting the audio output
y
J
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
5
E
• Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the
desired setting to select the default background video input
audio output.
J
Press MUTE again to resume the audio output.
y
J
N
• You can also rotate VOLUME (or press VOLUME +/–) to
resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
45 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Notes
Displaying the input source
information
“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
You can display the audio and video information of the
current input signal.
■ Video information
Information
Descriptions
5
M
1
Press AMP and then press MENU on
the remote control.
Type of the source video signals and
the video signals output at the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit.
HDMI SIGNAL
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
SET MENU
Resolution of the input signal (analog
or HDMI) and the output signal
(HDMI). When input video signals are
composite video or S-video signals,
the input video signals are indicated as
“Composite” or “S-Video”.
HDMI RES.
.
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
Resolution of the analog video signals
output at the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
ANALOG RES.
8
Press n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
8
INFO” and then press ENTER.
The audio information about the input source appears
in the OSD.
2
Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices.
HDMI ERROR
(HDMI MESSAGE)
Note
8
Press l / h to toggle between the audio
and video information displays.
3
4
“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
HDMI error and message
M
Press MENU on the remote control again
to exit from “SET MENU”.
Message
Cause
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
DEVICE OVER
■ Audio information
HDCP authentication failed.
HDCP ERROR
Out of Res.
Information
Descriptions
Out of resolution. The connected monitor is
not compatible with the resolution of the
input video signal.
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to
analog input.
FORMAT
The number of samples per second taken from
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
SAMPLING
CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
The number of bits passing a given point per
second.
BITRATE
FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or
PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically
switch decoders (“Surround EX”, etc.).
46 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Using the sleep timer
T
Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly
until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel
display.
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLETS (see page 28).
Disappears
Note
SLEEP OFF
Even if this unit is in the standby mode, this unit does not cut off
the power to AC OUTLETS while charging connected iPod (see
page 28).
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
5
T
Press AMP and then press SLEEP
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
I
K
STANDBY (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main
zone to the standby mode.
T
changes as shown below.
SLEEP 120min
SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60min
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field
program.
Flashes
SLEEP
ꢀSLEEP 120min.
Lights up
SLEEP
ꢀꢀStraight
47 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field programs
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing
(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
N
Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or press
5
B
AMP and then press PROG l / h
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
• When you play back the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
sources, this unit does not activate any sound field program.
• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher
than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.
Sound field program descriptions
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
■ For audio music sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend that you use the Pure Direct mode (see page 52).
Notes
• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 85).
CLASSICAL
Program
Descriptions
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish
wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the
center left of the arena.
Hall in Munich
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is
traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all
around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Vienna
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It
offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
48 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
LIVE/CLUB
Program
Descriptions
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound
field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
Cellar Club
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The
listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Roxy Theatre
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The
floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
■ For various sources
Notes
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 85).
ENTERTAINMENT
Program
Descriptions
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with
enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned
clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the
listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.
Sports
This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the
reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment
with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of
directions.
Action Game
This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field
effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of
the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.
Roleplaying Game
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The
listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the
vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 77 for details.
Notes
• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 85).
MOVIE
Program
Descriptions
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original
acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the
concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from
the left, right and rear.
Standard
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an
excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and
special effects-featuring movies.
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation
between dialog, sound effects and background music.
49 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
Program
Descriptions
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded
widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation
between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.
Adventure
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious
dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling,
reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center
positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater.
The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a
comfortable space with a certain sound depth.
Mono Movie
Note
The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
STEREO
Program
Descriptions
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit
downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates
a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
7ch Stereo
■ The Compressed Music Enhancer
MUSIC ENHANCER
Program
Descriptions
Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-
channel compression artifacts.
Straight Enhancer
7ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
■ Surround decode mode
SUR. DECODE
Program
Descriptions
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on
Sur. Decoder
50 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound field programs
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
5
Before performing the following operation, press AMP on
the remote control.
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources (Straight decoding mode)
When this unit is in the “Straight” mode, 2-channel stereo
sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Note
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.
O
C
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) to select
“Straight”.
■ Deactivating the “Straight” mode
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to sound field
CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display.
O
C
Press STRAIGHT (or STRAIGHT) so that
“Straight” disappears from the front panel
display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
Notes
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “Pure Direct” (see
51 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Using audio features
5
Before performing the following operations, press AMP on
the remote control.
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode
is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with
the least circuitry.
Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
P
D
Press PURE DIRECT (or PURE DIRECT)
to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.
P
The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up
Note
while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel
display automatically dims.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
Notes
7
Press LEVEL on the remote control and
1
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the Pure Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
8
then k / n repeatedly to select the speaker
you want to adjust.
– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level
settings)
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this
unit is turned off.
Display
FRONT L
FRONT R
CENTER
SUR. L
SUR. R
SBL
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
Center speaker
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation
is performed.
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Subwoofer
Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front left and right speaker channels.
SBR
SWFR
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
Presence left speaker
Presence right speaker
PRNS L
PRNS R
M
1
Press TONE CONTROL on the front
panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
y
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the
setting of the speakers.
• When the video monitor is turned on, the “LEVEL”
adjustment menu appears in the video monitor.
N
2
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
the low-frequency response (BASS).
Control range: –6 dB to +6 dB
8
Press l / h to adjust the speaker output
level.
2
3
8
• Press h to increase the value.
8
• Press l to decrease the value.
Notes
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency
sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround
speakers may not match.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is
selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input
source.
7
Press LEVEL to turn off the speaker level
adjustment display.
52 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM tuning
Overview
You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired FM/AM station:
Frequency tuning mode (AUTO TUNING/MANUAL TUNING)
You can search or specify the frequency of the desired FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “Basic tuning
operations” on this page).
Preset tuning mode (PRESET TUNING)
You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and then recall the station by specifying the preset group and
Note
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
Manual tuning mode (MANUAL TUNING)
Basic tuning operations
Use this feature if the signal from the station you
want to select is weak and you cannot tune by using
the automatic tuning. When this unit is in the manual
tuning mode, “MANUAL TUNING” appears in the
front panel display for a moment.
4
Before performing the following operations, press TUNER
on the remote control.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
4
TUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
AꢀFM 88.9MHz
No colon (:)
source.
y
C
7
2
3
Press BAND (or BAND) to select the
reception band.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches
the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal
quality.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
Preset tuning mode (PRESET TUNING)
Use this feature to recall the preset stations. When
this unit is in the preset tuning mode, “PRESET
TUNING” appears in the front panel display for a
moment. Frequency tuning is not possible. See
page 54 for details.
B
M
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) to select the desired tuning mode.
Automatic tuning mode (AUTO TUNING)
Use this feature when the signal from the station you
want to select is strong.
When this unit is in the automatic tuning mode,
“AUTO TUNING” appears in the front panel display
for a moment. The AUTO indicator appears in the
front panel display.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
4
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to tune into
the desired station.
E
8
• Press h (or k) to tune into a higher
Lights up
frequency.
E
8
• Press l (or n) to tune into a lower frequency.
AUTO
AꢀFM 88.9MHz
No colon (:)
53 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM tuning
y
• When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up.
Using station preset feature
• Hold down the button to continue searching when this unit is in
the manual tuning mode.
Use this feature to store up to 40 stations FM/AM stations
(A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset
station groups). Preset the desired stations to this unit by
using the automatic or manual preset tuning features in
advance (see “Automatic station preset” and “Manual
G
A
• Press INFO (or INFO) repeatedly to toggle the frequency
information and sound field program information in the front
panel.
4
Before performing the following operations, press TUNER
on the remote control.
4
Before performing the following operations, press TUNER
on the remote control.
■ Direct frequency tuning
Use this feature tune into the desired station directly by
entering the frequency.
B
M
1
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET
TUNING”.
7
1
Press BAND on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired reception
band.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired
preset station number (A1 to E8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
8
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
B
M
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “AUTO TUNING”
or “MANUAL TUNING”.
A1:FM 88.9MHz
Preset group and preset station number
AꢀFM 88.9MHz
No colon (:)
y
y
You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual
D
8
A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.
B
tuning is not possible. Press SEARCH MODE (or
M
SRCH MODE) to turn the colon (:) off.
3
Enter the frequency of the desired station by
G
pressing the numeric buttons ( ).
Example: To tune into 103.7 MHz
3
7
0
1
y
If the entered frequency is out of the range of the FM/AM tuning,
“WRONG STATION!” appears in the front panel display and
then this unit automatically tunes into the last selected station.
54 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM tuning
■ Manual station preset
Use this feature to store the AM or FM stations with weak
signals manually.
4
Before performing the following operations, press TUNER
on the remote control.
■ Automatic station preset
1
2
Tune into a station.
See page 53 for tuning instructions.
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in
order.
F
9
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
4
TUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
MEMORY
Flashes
C
7
2
Press BAND (or BAND) to select “FM”
as the reception band.
y
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
F
To cancel the preset memory mode, press MEMORY (or
9
MEMORY) again.
F
Press and hold MEMORY (or
3
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
3
9
MEMORY) for more than 3 seconds.
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.
preset station group and number (A1 to E8)
while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
E
8
• Press h (or k) to select a higher preset
station group and number.
Flash
E
8
• Press l (or n) to select a lower preset station
group and number.
Flashes
MEMORY
AUTO
A1:FM 88.9MHz
Flashes
MEMORY
A1:FM 88.9MHz
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the
MEMORY indicator disappears.
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
y
• You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores
y
You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing
D
8
FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) and
D
8
A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.
E
then PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
8
(or PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly after you perform step 3
to select the preset station number under which the first station
will be stored.
F
9
4
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY) while
the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
F
• To cancel the automatic station preset, press MEMORY (or
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
9
MEMORY) again.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
Notes
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for
all the available stations and copy the stored stations to the rest
preset station numbers.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength or an AM radio station,
tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual
station preset” below.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
55 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM tuning
■ Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
4
Before performing the following operations, press TUNER
on the remote control.
D
Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
1
E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
B
Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
2
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
Flashes
MEMORY
E1:FM 88.9MHz
Flashes
D
Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
3
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
Flashes
MEMORY
A5:FM 88.9MHz
Flashes
B
4
Press EDIT again.
“EXCHANGE E1-A5” appears in the front panel
display and the assignments of the two preset stations
are exchanged.
56 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
XM Satellite Radio tuning
XM Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio,
stand-up comedy, children’s and entertainment programming. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio quality from
coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan.
XM Satellite Radio online information
For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/
For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/
Note
The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
XM READY legal disclaimer
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM
service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any
technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees
and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent
explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XM-RADIO (US
residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial- free channels and advertising-
supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer
Agreement available at www.xmradio.com (US residents) and www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48
contiguous United States and Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners.
■ Enjoying XM HD Surround content
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM
Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience (see page 78).
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock
Connect the XM Mini-Tuner and the XM Dock (sold
separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.
For details, see the operating instructions provided with
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock.
y
To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly
facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can
mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”
information in the front panel or “XM Information” screen in the
and adjust the orientation of the antenna.
XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock
(sold separately)
Note
If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in
the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna,
L
R
CD
SIRIUS
XM
ANTENNA
57 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio tuning
Activating XM Satellite Radio
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock,
Basic XM Satellite Radio
operations
inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to
®
your XM Ready home audio system, and installed the
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving
XM programming. There are three places to find your
eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on
the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0.
Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares
for reference.
3
XM) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio
information (such as channel number, channel name,
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel appears in the front panel display.
Lights up
MULTI CH
VCR
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
Note
001ꢀPreview
The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at
http://activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-
967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada
online at https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR
(1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will
send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup.
Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy
periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio
system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup
on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.
y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
Notes
• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio”
remedies.
2
Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on page 59.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on page 59.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access
y
• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD
surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in
page 60).
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front
58 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio tuning
■ Preset Search mode
3
Before performing the following operations, press XM.
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset
■ All Channel Search mode
B
M
1
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH
SEARCH”.
y
The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is “001
Preview”.
B
M
1
2
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET
SEARCH”.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
2
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within all channels.
y
D
8
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
E
8
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n).
• To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front
panel display, select channel “0”.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
3
■ Category Search mode
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change
the preset channel number (1 to 8).
B
M
1
2
3
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
G
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) ( ).
D
8
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
■ Direct number access mode
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
M
Press SRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.
1
8
for a channel within the selected channel
category.
G
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
desired three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
2
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
E
8
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n).
G
numeric buttons ( ) as shown below.
3
1
2
y
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
G
numeric buttons ( ) on the remote control and then press
T
ENT to confirm the input number.
T
• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms
the entered channel number.
G
T
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons ( ) or ENT
cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.
59 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio tuning
3
Before performing the following operations, press XM.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
3
8
(or PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select
a preset channel group and number (A1 to
E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The preset channel number appears in the front panel
display.
Setting the XM Satellite Radio
preset channels
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
Flashes
MEMORY
C5 043ꢀXMU
Selected preset channel group and number
1
Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
page 58 for details.
y
You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing
D
8
A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.
F
9
4
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY) to set
the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a
preset channel while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
043ꢀXMU
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns
off in the front panel display.
Currently selected channel number
F
9
2
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
C5:043ꢀXMU
Colon (:)
MEMORY
Flashes
Note
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in
the same preset channel group and number is cleared.
Note
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
60 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio tuning
y
3
Before performing the following operations, press XM.
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by
using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 96).
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such
as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,
or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front
panel display or in the OSD.
8
• To hold the current XM Raido information, press ENTER on
the remote control while it is being displayed. The HOLD
indicator flashes in the front panel display while you are
Note
8
holding the XM information. Press ENTER again to release
the held information.
• When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Dock cannot receive
the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel display.
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
“Troubleshooting” on page 110 for appropriate remedies.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the OSD
information in the front panel display
O
Press DISPLAY.
G
A
Press INFO (or INFO) repeatedly to toggle
between the following XM Satellite Radio
information display modes.
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.
[4]
XMꢀInformationꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀANT:
e.g.) 043 XMU
CHANNEL INFO
[1]
[2]
[3]
ALLꢀCHꢀSEARCH
043:XMU
:Rock
Channel number/name
[5]
[6]
:Coldplay
:Speedꢀofꢀsound
e.g.) ROCK
CATEGORY INFO
Channel category
[1] Search mode (see page 58)
[2] Channel category
[3] Song title
e.g.) Coldplay / Sp
SONG INFO
Artist name / Song title
[4] Antenna reception level
[5] Channel number/name
[6] Artist name
ANTENNA INFO
e.g.) 043
ANT:
-
Channel number/Antenna reception level
y
O
• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again.
e.g.) 7ch Enhancer
• XM status messages also appear in the OSD.
DSP PROG. INFO
• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-
Sound field program
8
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information, press ENTER
on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD.
“HOLD” appears in the screen while you are holding the XM
Back to “CHANNEL INFO”
8
information. Press ENTER again or change the XM Satellite
Radio channel to release the held information.
• The current XM Satellite Radio reception level appears on the
top of the XM Satellite Radio information screen. For the best
reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna of Home Dock
so that “
” or “
” is displayed here. “
” is displayed if
the antenna cannot receive the signals correctly. In this case,
adjust the orientation of the antenna (see page 57).
61 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ TUNING
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only
SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical masterpieces. From
authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it's all 100%
commercial-free.
SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your
subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games
are broadcast during their respective seasons.)
Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don't forget a host of other
great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more
information, visit http://www.sirius.com/.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio legal disclaimer
SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in Canada for subscribers
with a Canadian address. To Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
y
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed
at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The
orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs
Connecting the SiriusConnect™
tuner
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the
depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals
SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see
supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the
the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect
tuner.
antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or
“SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor (see
page 67) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the
orientation of the antenna.
SiriusConnect™ tuner and the antenna
(sold separately)
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall
outlet.
Notes
• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in
the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect
tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the
connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna (see
page 115).
L
T
N
A
V
5
C
D
R
CD
SIRIUS
XM
• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this
unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.
ANTENNA
To the AC wall outlet
AM
62 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
Activating SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ subscription
Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
operations
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need
to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To
activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is
uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is
12-digit number and it appears on the package of the
SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect
tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel “0” (see below).
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
F
mode selector on the remote control to SOURCE.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
K
SIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights
up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio information (such as channel number, channel
name, category, artist name, or song title) for the
currently selected channel appears in the front panel
display.
■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your
SiriusConnect tuner
K
Press SIRIUS on the remote control.
1
2
Lights up
G
T
Press 0 and then ENT to display the
Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.
“000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx”
indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect
tuner) appears in the front panel display.
MULTI CH
VCR
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
MD/CD-R CD
TUNER
XM
SIRIUS
184 SIRIUS Wea
y
When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
y
G
A
To scroll the message again, press INFO (or INFO).
Notes
Write the Sirius ID below.
ID:
• The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you
can only select “184” or “000”.
3
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate
your subscription.
• If a status message or an error message appears in the front
panel display or in the OSD, see the “SIRIUS Satellite
appropriate remedies.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
Contact for activation
URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
2
Search for a channel by using one of the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on page 64.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on page 64.
y
Status messages appear in the front panel display or video
monitor during the activation. Once the activation is finished,
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Preset Search mode” on page 64.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access
y
• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL
888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears in the front panel
G
display. To scroll the message again, press INFO (or
A
INFO).
page 65).
• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the
63 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
■ Preset Search mode
K
Before performing the following operations, press SIRIUS
on the remote control.
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see
■ All Channel Search mode
B
M
1
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH
SEARCH”.
B
M
1
2
3
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET
SEARCH”.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
2
D
8
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within all channels.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
PRESET/TUNING/CH
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
E
8
l
/
h
(or PRESET/CH
k
/
n).
8
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change
the preset channel number (1 to 8).
D
8
pressing CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h).
y
■ Category Search mode
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
G
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) ( ).
B
M
1
2
3
Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH
MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
■ Direct number access mode
M
1
Press SRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.
D
8
Press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search
for a channel within the selected channel
category.
G
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
desired three-digit channel number.
2
8
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
G
numeric buttons ( ) as shown below.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
3
1
E
2
PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or
8
PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).
Note
y
This unit skips the channels when this unit is All Channel Search
mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not
malfunction of this unit):
– the channel is out of service.
• To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the front panel
display, select channel “0”.
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
numeric buttons ( ) on the remote control and then press
G
T
ENT to confirm the input number.
– you do not subscribe to the channel.
T
• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms
the entered channel number.
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a
one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms
the entered channel number.
• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears in the front
panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number
G
T
by using the numeric buttons ( ) or press ENT to cancel
64 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
y
K
Before performing the following operations, press SIRIUS
on the remote control.
You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing
D
8
A/B/C/D/E (or A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly.
F
9
4
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY) to set
the selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel
as a preset channel while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
Setting the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ preset channels
You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
on page 64.
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns
off in the front panel display.
A1:023 Hair Na
1
Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio search modes.
page 63 for details.
Colon (:)
Note
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in
the same preset channel group and number is cleared.
001 SIRIUS Hit
Setting the Parental Lock
You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access
to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit
automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is
in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode
Currently selected channel number
F
9
2
Press MEMORY (or MEMORY).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
E
and you search a channel by pressing PRESET/
8
TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n).
■ Setting the code number and the locked
channels
MEMORY
Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number
(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.
Flashes
Note
5
Press AMP on the remote control and then
1
2
3
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
M
press MENU to display.
8
Press n to select “MANUAL SETUP” and
8
then press ENTER.
E
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
3
8
(or PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select
8
Press n repeatedly to select “INPUT
8
MENU” and then press ENTER.
a preset channel group and number (A1 to
E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The preset channel number appears in the front panel
display.
Flashes
MEMORY
A1ꢀ023 Hair Na
Currently selected preset channel group and
number
65 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
Note
8
Press k / n repeatedly to select “SIRIUS”
8
and then press ENTER.
The following menu screen appears.
4
In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit
outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the channel
is locked. Only the first eight characters of each channel
name are displayed in the list.
A) SIRIUS
. INPUTꢀRENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
PARENTAL LOCK
8
10 Press ENTER to lock the selected
channel.
Check mark appears before the locked channel.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
y
8
When you select the locked channel and press ENTER,
this unit unlocks the selected channel.
8
Press n repeatedly to select “PARENTAL
8
LOCK” and then press ENTER.
“NEW PIN:0000” appears.
5
you want.
PARENTAL LOCK
9
12 Press RETURN to exit from the
-
NEWꢀPIN:0000
“PARENTAL LOCK” screen.
[0] [9]:NUMBER
[ENT]:Enter
M
13 Press MENU to exit from the setup menu.
This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in
the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. If the channel is
locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather
& Emergency” or “000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx”
(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the Sirius ID of your
SiriusConnect tuner).
Note
If a SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to this unit, “Not
Available” appears.
y
If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN:___”
appears instead of “NEW PIN:0000”. Refer to step 8 and
then proceed the operations.
y
• If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number,
use “SR PIN” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to reset the Parental
Lock code number.
channels are unlocked.
6
Enter the desired 4-digit code number by
G
using the numeric buttons ( ).
■ Tuning into the locked channels
y
You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct
number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you
tune into the locked channel, following message appears
in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set
for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons
9
Press RETURN to return the previous menu level
without setting the code number.
8
7
8
9
Press ENTER to confirm the code number.
“OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel
operations.
G
T
(
) or press ENT to cancel the tuning.
Enter the 4-digit code number you set at step
6 above to unlock the protection.
When the code number is correct, “OK” and then the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears.
____
PIN:
Notes
• If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the
front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously
selected channel.
• If a channel is unlocked, you can also select the channel in
Zone2.
8
Press l / h repeatedly to select the
desired channel category and then press
k / n repeatedly to select the channel you
want to lock.
8
66 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
y
K
Before performing the following operations, press SIRIUS
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. You can set whether to display the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by
using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 96).
• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character
that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
on the remote control.
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ information
You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
(such as channel number, channel name, category, artist
name, composer name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD.
• To hold the current SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press
8
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed.
8
Press ENTER again to release the held information.
• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the
signals, “ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display.
• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.
Note
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information in the OSD
■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
O
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.
information in the front panel display
G
A
Press INFO (or INFO) repeatedly to toggle
between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information display modes.
[5]
SIRIUSꢀInformationꢀANT:
[1]
[2]
ALLꢀCHꢀSEARCH
[6]
[7]
008:Bigꢀ'80s
:Pop
:Sanumemo
e.g.) 008 Big '80s
CHANNEL INFO
Channel number/name
[3]
[4]
:RoadꢀtoꢀIndia
C:FrankieꢀZipper
e.g.) Pop
CATEGORY INFO
Channel category
[1] Search mode (see page 63)
[2] Channel category
[3] Song title
e.g.) Sanumemo / Roa
e.g.) Frankie Zipper
SONG INFO
Artist name / Song title
[4] Composer name
[5] Antenna reception level
[6] Channel number/name
[7] Artist name
COMPOSER INFO
Composer name
y
O
• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again.
• SIRIUS status messages also appear in the OSD.
ANTENNA INFO
e.g.) 043
ANT:
-
• You can select the amount of time the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-
• To hold the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press
Channel number/Antenna reception level
8
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in
e.g.) 7ch Enhancer
DSP PROG. INFO
the OSD. While this unit is holding the information screen,
“HOLD” appears in the OSD.
• The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while
Sound field program
8
you are holding the SIRIUS information. Press ENTER
again or change the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel to release
the held information.
Back to “CHANNEL INFO”
67 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING IPOD™
Using iPod™
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 25), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You
can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts
(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 50).
Notes
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or
not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 94). The
DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode.
Controlling iPod™
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with
the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Remote control operation
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
Before performing the following operations, press
4
V-AUX/DOCK on the remote control.
Button
ENTER
k
Function
y
8
Subsequent menu
Menu up
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod
(some models only).
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
n
Menu down
l
Previous menu
h
Subsequent menu
Search backward (Press and hold)
Search forward (Press and hold)
Skip forward
0
ll
hh
a
b
s
Skip backward
Stop
e
Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
p
Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
M
O
MENU
Previous menu
Display
DISPLAY
68 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using iPod™
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD
of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod
in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for
your iPod to suit your personal preferences.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
•
•
Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
•
Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
y
• The name of the song being played also appears in the front
panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in
“OPTION MENU” (see page 96).
y
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “
” appears
• You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Notes
Choices: Off, One, All
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
•
•
•
Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in
8
8
the OSD. Press ENTER or k/n repeatedly on the remote
control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy
watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
y
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or “
”
1
All
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of
songs are being repeated.
■ The function of the play information
O
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
1
2
display
The following display appears in the OSD.
[1]
[7]
[8]
iPod
Top
iPodꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[Play]ꢀꢀꢀꢀ
All
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
[2]
[3]
[4]
ꢀ1ꢀ/ꢀ9ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀFrankieꢀZipperꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀMade-to-orderꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀRoadꢀtoꢀIndiaꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀ||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;ꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀ0:51ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ-7:44ꢀꢀ
[9]
Composers
Settings
[5]
[6]
8
Press k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod
[10]
8
menu and then press ENTER to begin
playback of the selected song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums
(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),
Composers (composers), Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
[1] Playback status
[2] Track number/total tracks
[3] Artist name
[4] Song title
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
[5] Progress bar
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
[6] Elapsed time
[7] Shuffle and repeat icons
[8]
(playback),
(pausing),
(search
forward) and
(search backward)
[9] Name of the album
[10] Remaining time
69 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS
Using Bluetooth™ components
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and
enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between
this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your
Bluetooth component in advance.
Note
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter
and your Bluetooth™ component
If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front
Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth
component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this
unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been
deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a
Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.
panel display.
4
5
Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth adapter.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in
the Bluetooth device list.
y
• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you
use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter.
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other
component with which Bluetooth communications are to be
established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s
operating instructions.
Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth
device list and then enter the pass key
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.
When the pairing procedure is successful,
There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START
PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.
“Completed” appears in the front panel display.
Note
■ Pairing by using “SET MENU”
Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor.
Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See
page 95 for details.
The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight
Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully
with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the
pairing data for the least recently used other component is
cleared.
■ Quick pairing
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully
understand all the instructions before starting.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press
1
4
V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the
4
V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the
input source.
input source.
2
Start playback of your Bluetooth component.
When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the
Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the
DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display.
2
3
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with.
C
7
Press and hold BAND (or BAND) for 3
seconds.
y
8
• When you press ENTER on the remote control, the
connected Bluetooth adapter searches and connect to the last
connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth adapter
cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in
the front panel display.
Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing,
“Searching...” appears for a moment. While the
Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK
indicator flashes in the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth
y
9
component, press RETURN.
C
7
To cancel the pairing, press BAND (or BAND) again.
70 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECORDING
Recording
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
Caution
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being
recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and
adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your
DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output
from the player.
Notes
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• TONE CONTROL (see page 52) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 52) and the sound field programs (see page 48)
do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• The XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT (REC) channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
1
2
Turn on all the connected components.
3
4
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
R
Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one
4
of the input selector buttons ( )) to select
the source component you want to record
from.
Start recording on the recording component.
71 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
Advanced sound configurations
Changing sound field parameter
settings
B
Press PROG l / h repeatedly to select
the desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
3
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
8
Press k / n to select the desired sound
8
field parameter and then l / h to change
4
the selected sound field parameter value.
Note
8
• Press h to increase the value.
8
• Press l to decrease the value.
You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see
page 97). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,
set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 74.
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
5
S
Press AMP and then PARAMETER on
the remote control.
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
The following screen is shown in the OSD.
8
In this case, press k / n to scroll through pages.
• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,
8
press n repeatedly to select “INITIALIZE” and then press
8
Sound field program category
h. Once the confirmation screen appears in the OSD, press
8
8
h to confirm or l to cancel the initialization.
MOVIE
1/2
.
Sci-Fi
Cursor
SUR.;;PLIIx Movie
DSP LEVEL;;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;;16ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;;16ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0
MOVIE
2/2
Sci-Fi
SB INIT.DLY;;15ms
SB ROOM SIZE;;1.0
DIALOG LIFT;;;;;0
. INITIALIZE
Select
[p]/[[]:
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter
values
Initialize
[[]:
S
Press PARAMETER to turn off the sound
field parameter screen.
5
72 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position
(DIALG.LIFT)
■ Basic configuration of sound field
programs
Each sound field program has some parameters defining
the characteristics of the program. To customize the
selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/
or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.
y
The ideal
dialogue
position.
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound
field programs (DSP LEVEL)
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect
sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field
in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to
adjust the level of the effect sounds.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”.
Move up to the ideal dialogue position.
The DSP effect
sound level is low.
The DSP effect sound
level is high.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the
highest position.
Adjust “DSP LEVEL” in the following cases:
Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL”
• The effect sound of the selected sound field
program is too weak.
• You cannot recognize any difference between the
sound field programs.
Notes
• “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”
is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial
dialogue position.
Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL”
• The sound is vague.
• You feel that the additional sound effect is
excessive.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
73 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations
Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail.
y
Sound field parameter
Features
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the
apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the
first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to
the reflection face.
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the
corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the
CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
74 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
Features
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the
corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the
CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Sound source
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual
walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of
a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one
which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to
as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter
lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Live
Dead
Time
Time
Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
75 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
Features
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
REV.TIME
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Reverberation
Source sound
Reverberation
Early reflections
60 dB
60 dB
60 dB
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
REV.DELAY
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
Reverberation
Time
REV.DELAY
REV.TIME
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
REV.LEVEL
Control range: 0 to 100%
Source sound
(dB)
REV. LEVEL
Time
76 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
Features
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
DIRECT
(“2ch Stereo” only)
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only
• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry
when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer
in the following cases:
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 85).
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence
right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The
available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers.
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
PL LEVEL
PR LEVEL
(“7ch Stereo” only)
Control range: 0 to 100%
Straight and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.
EFFECT LEVEL
(“Straight Enhancer” and
“7ch Enhancer” only)
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
■ Selecting decoders used with sound
field programs (SUR.)
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).
See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field
program.
Available decoders
Decoder
Functions
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro
Logic II) processing for movie
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder
is not available when “SUR.B L/R
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
DTS processing for movie sources.
Neo:6 Cinema
77 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Selecting decoders
y
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-
channels.
Press AMP and then PARAMETER to display the decoder
parameters in the OSD. Press k / n repeatedly to select the
desired decoder parameter and then press l / h repeatedly to
5
S
8
8
change the value of the selected parameter.
5
Q
Press AMP and then SUR. DECODE
repeatedly on the remote control to select the
desired surround decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on the
type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
■ Decoder descriptions (SUR.)
Decoder
Descriptions
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder
PLIIx Game
PLII Game
DTS processing for movie sources.
DTS processing for music sources.
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural Surround processing for any sources.
The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals and analog 2-channel input sources.
When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is
selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any
additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are played back in
stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM
Satellite Radio.
Neural Sur.
(U.S.A. and Canada models
only)
y
When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND
DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.
78 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced sound configurations
Decoder parameter descriptions
Decoder parameter
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
PANORAMA
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Choices: OFF, ON
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front
or towards the rear.
DIMENSION
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
CENTER WIDTH
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
C. IMAGE
(“Neo:6 Music” only)
Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to
1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)
Initial setting: 0.3
79 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 32).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU
Menu
Parameter
Functions
Page
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP
speaker terminal.
EXTRA SP ASSIGN
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the
low-frequency signals.
LFE/BASS OUT
Selects the size of the front speakers.
FRONT SP
Selects the size of the center speaker.
CENTER SP
Selects the size and number of the surround speakers.
Selects the size and number of the surround back speakers.
SUR. L/R SP
SUR.B L/R SP
CROSS OVER
Selects the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or
Switches the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or
unclear.
SUBWOOFER PHASE
Adjust the balance the speaker levels between the front left or
surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET”
FR.L/FR.R/CNTR/
SUR.L/SUR.R/
SBL/SBR/SWFR/
PR.L/PR.R
B)SP LEVEL
Selects the unit to adjust the speaker distance.
88
88
UNIT
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the
respective channel.
FRONT L/FRONT R/
CENTER/SUR. L/
SUR. R/SBL/SBR/
SWFR/PRNS L/
PRNS R
—
Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER SET”, “SP
LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.
88
D)TEST TONE
80 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Volume menu 2 VOLUME MENU
Parameter
Functions
Page
Selects whether this unit automatically adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the
volume level or not.
89
ADAPTIVE DRC
Selects whether this unit adjusts the DSP effect level automatically in conjunction with the
volume level or not.
89
ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL
Sets the maximum volume level of the main zone.
89
89
89
MUTE TYPE
MAX VOL.
Sets the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on.
INIT. VOL.
Sound menu 3 SOUND MENU
Menu
Parameter
Functions
Page
Selects the type of equalizer.
EQ TYPE SELECT
GEQ
A)EQUALIZER
Adjusts the tonal quality of the speakers when you set “EQ TYPE
SELECT” to “GEQ”.
90
Selects whether this unit outputs the test tone while making
adjustments of “GEQ” or not.
TEST
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
91
91
91
SPEAKER
B)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
HEADPHONE
SPEAKER
Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the speakers.
C)DYNAMIC
RANGE
Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the
headphones.
HEADPHONE
Selects whether this unit activates the automatic audio and video
synchronization function (automatic lip sync) or not.
92
92
92
HDMI AUTO
AUTO
D)LIPSYNC
Makes fine adjustments of the audio delay when the automatic audio
and video synchronization function is active.
Adjustment the audio delay manually when the connected video
monitor is not compatible with the automatic audio and video
synchronization function or “HDMI AUTO” is set to “OFF”.
MANUAL
—
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES
decoders by using the connected surround back speakers.
E)EXTD SUR.
81 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Input menu 4 INPUT MENU
Note
Some parameters described below may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input
sources.
Parameter
Functions
Page
Assigns the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of
this unit do not correspond to your needs.
I/O ASSIGNMENT
Changes the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
Adjusts the level of the signal input at each jack.
94
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
Switches the decoder activation mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for
DTS signals.
DECODER MODE
Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
94
STANDBY CHARGE
PARENTAL LOCK
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
Pair the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a
START PAIRING
Selects the video source played back in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
BGV
Selects the number of channels input from an external decoder.
INPUT CH
FRONT
Selects the analog jacks at which the front channel signals from an external decoder are input
when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”.
Option menu 5 OPTION MENU
Menu
Parameter
Functions
Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display.
Adjusts the vertical position of the OSD.
Page
DIMMER
A)DISPLAY SET
96
OSD SHIFT
OSD-SOURCE
Sets the amount of time to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information, XM Satellite Radio information, or iPod menu in the
video monitor after you perform a certain operation.
Sets the amount of time to display the status information screen after
you perform a certain operation.
OSD-AMP
Selects the mode to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information,
XM Satellite Radio information, or iPod menu in the front panel
display.
FL SCROLL
Selects whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO,
S VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
VIDEO CONV.
B)VIDEO SET
—
Prevents accidental changes to sound field program parameter values
and other system settings.
C)MEMORY GUARD
82 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Menu
Parameter
Functions
Page
Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input
sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the
power of this unit.
AUDIO SELECT
D)INIT. CONFIG
Designates the default decoder mode for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
98
98
DECODER MODE
EXTD SUR.
S.AUDIO
Designates the extended decoder mode for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
E)HDMI SET
Adjusts the maximum volume level in Zone 2.
MAX VOL.
F)ZONE2 SET
Sets the volume level of Zone 2 when you turn on the power of this
unit.
INIT. VOL.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 46).
83 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Using SET MENU
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
8
Press k / n repeatedly and then press
4
8
ENTER to select and enter the desired
menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
3 SOUND MENU
S
• If you press PARAMETER during the “SET MENU”
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)LIPSYNC
operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled.
9
• Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.
E)EXTD SUR.
5
M
1
2
Press AMP and then MENU to enter
“SET MENU”.
Up/Down
Enter
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
8
Press k / n repeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
5
8
Press k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
8
submenu.
SET MENU
The following display is an example where “LFE
LEVEL” is selected.
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;SIGNAL INFO
.
B)LFE LEVEL
Up/Down
Enter
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;-20dB
Up/Down
Adjust
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
8
3
Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
8
Press k / n to select the desired parameter
8
and then l / h to change the parameter
settings.
6
7
MANUAL SETUP
. 1 BASIC MENU
2 VOLUME MENU
3 SOUND MENU
4 INPUT MENU
5 OPTION MENU
8
• Press h to increase the value.
8
• Press l to decrease the value.
Up/Down
Enter
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
M
Press MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
84 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT
1 BASIC MENU
Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker
settings. Most of the “BASIC MENU” parameters are set
automatically when you run the automatic setup.
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
A)SPEAKER SET
LFE/BASS OUT
1 BASIC MENU
. A)SPEAKER SET
B)SP LEVEL
C)SP DISTANCE
D)TEST TONE
SWFR FRONT >BOTH
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Enter
[ENTER]:
LFE signals output
Subwoofer(s) and speakers
Choice
y
Front
Other
Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL” and “SP DISTANCE”.
Subwoofer(s)
speakers
speakers
Output
Output
No output
No output
Output
No output
No output
No output
BOTH
SWFR
FRONT
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
y
8
To select the desired parameter, press k / n repeatedly.
No output
Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN
Selects the function of the speakers connected to the
EXTRA SP terminals.
Low-frequency signals output
Subwoofer(s) and speakers
Choice
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
A)SPEAKER SET
X
Subwoofer(s)
X
EXTRA SP ASSIGN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ZONE2 >FRONT B
ZONE B PRESENCE
NONE
*1
*4
*2
*3
*1
*3
*3
*3
BOTH
SWFR
FRONT
*1
ZONE2 SET
XXXX[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/DownXXXXX
Not Available
XXXX[p]/[[]:EnterXXXXXXX
No output
X
Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front
channels and other speakers set to “SMALL”.
Always output the low-frequency signals of the front
channels.
Choice
ZONE2
Descriptions
*2
*3
*4
Select this setting when you use the Zone 2
speakers (see page 104).
Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set
to “LARGE”.
Select this setting when you use another front
FRONT B
ZONE B
Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to
“SMALL” or “NONE”.
Select this setting when you use another front
Select this setting when you use the presence
PRESENCE
NONE
Select this setting when you do not use the
EXTRA SP terminals.
Notes
• This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP
• If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 109), you cannot
select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.
• After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out
85 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Measure for the speaker size
The woofer section of a speaker is
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
A)SPEAKER SET
SUR. L/R SP
Front speakers FRONT SP
NONE >SMALL LARGE
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT SP
Choice
LARGE
Descriptions
Select this setting when the surround speakers
are large.
SMALL >LARGE
Select this setting when the surround speakers
are small.
SMALL
Choice
LARGE
Descriptions
Select this setting when you do not use the
surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual
L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.
NONE
Select this setting when the front speakers are
large.
Select this setting when the front speakers are
small.
SMALL
Surround back left/right speakers
SUR.B L/R SP
Note
A)SPEAKER SET
SUR.B L/R SP
When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, you can select only
“LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to
other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the value to
“LARGE” automatically.
SMLx1 >SMLx2 LRGx1
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choice
LRGx1
Descriptions
A)SPEAKER SET
CENTER SP
Select this setting when the single surround back
speaker is large.
Select this setting when the surround back left
and right speakers are Large.
LRGx2
SMLx1
SMLx2
NONE
NONE >SMALL LARGE
Select this setting when the single surround back
speaker is small.
When the center speaker is large:
Select “LARGE” (large).
Select this setting when the surround back left
and right speakers are small.
When the center speaker is small:
Select “SMALL” (small).
Select this setting when you do not use the
surround back speakers. The surround back
channel signals are directed to the surround left
and right speakers.
When you do not use the center speaker:
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
Note
Choice
LARGE
Descriptions
If the Dolby TrueHD audio signals are input and “SUR.B L/R
SP” is set to “NONE”, the left and right surround back channels
are not directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Select this setting when the center speaker is
large.
Select this setting when the center speaker is
small.
SMALL
Select this setting when you do not use the center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed
to the front left and right speakers.
NONE
86 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Bass cross over CROSS OVER
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) in “SPEAKER
SET” (see page 85). All frequencies below the selected
frequency will be sent to the subwoofer(s) or front
speakers depending on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT”
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 85).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting:
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
FR.L/FR.R/SWFR/PR.L/PR.R: 0 dB
CNTR/SUR.L/SUR.R/SBL/SBR: –1.0 dB
A)SPEAKER SET
CROSS OVER
B)SP LEVEL
1/2
B)SP LEVEL
2/2
. FR.L
FR.R
CNTR
SUR.L
SUR.R
. SBL
SBR
SWFR
FREQ;;;;80Hz
y
SP LEVEL
FR.L
FR.R
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover
frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and
set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
Front right speaker
Center speaker
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
CNTR
SUR.L
SUR.R
SBL
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Subwoofer
A)SPEAKER SET
SUBWOOFER PHASE
SBR
SWFR
PR.L
>NORMAL REVERSE
Presence left speaker
Presence right speaker
PR.R
Choice
Functions
y
Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.
NORMAL
(normal)
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the
crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or
slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
• Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER LEVEL” setting (see page 88).
Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.
REVERSE
(reverse)
Notes
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R
87 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Notes
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B
■ Test tone D)TEST TONE
Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER
SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.
C)SP DISTANCE
1/2
C)SP DISTANCE
2/2
D)TEST TONE
>OFF ON
. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet
FRONT L;;;10.0ft
FRONT R;;;10.0ft
CENTER;;;;;8.5ft
SUR. L;;;;;8.0ft
SUR. R;;;;;8.0ft
. SBL;;;;;;;;8.0ft
SBR;;;;;;;;8.0ft
SWFR;;;;;;;10.0ft
PRNS L;;;;;10.0ft
PRNS R;;;;;10.0ft
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Select
[p]/[[]:
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Adjust
[p]/[[]:
Select
Return
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:
Unit for the speaker distance adjustment UNIT
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
Choice
OFF
Functions
This unit does not output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP
DISTANCE” settings.
Choice
meters (m)
feet (ft)
Functions
Adjusts speaker distances in meters.
Adjusts speaker distances in feet.
This unit outputs the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SP LEVEL”, and “SP
DISTANCE” settings.
ON
y
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting:
FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/
PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)
Note
This function is automatically turned off if you exit from “BASIC
MENU”.
SUR. L/SUR. R/SBL/SBR: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
SP DISTANCE
FRONT L
Adjusted speaker
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
Center speaker
FRONT R
CENTER
SUR. L
SUR. R
SBL
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Surround back left speaker
Surround back right speaker
Subwoofer
SBR
SWFR
Presence left speaker
Presence right speaker
PRNS L
PRNS R
88 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Adaptive DSP level ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP
effect level (see page 73) automatically in conjunction
with the volume level.
2 VOLUME MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume
settings.
Choice
AUTO
Functions
2 VOLUME MENU
Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with
the volume level.
. ADAPTIVE DRC;;;;OFF
ADAPTIVE DSP
LEVEL;;;;OFF
Does not adjust the DSP effect level
automatically.
MUTE TYPE;;;;FULL
MAX VOL.;;;;+16.5dB
INIT. VOL.;;;;;;OFF
OFF
Up/Down
Select
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
Note
Even if you set “ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL” to “AUTO”, this unit
does not change but the fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP
LEVEL” (see page 73).
Adaptive dynamic range control
ADAPTIVE DRC
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in
conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful
when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When
“ADAPTIVE DRC” is set to “AUTO”, this unit controls
the dynamic range as follows:
Muting type MUTE TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
– If the VOLUME setting is low:
the dynamic range is narrow
– If the VOLUME setting is high:
Choice
FULL
–20dB
Functions
Mutes all the audio output.
the dynamic range is wide
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
Maximum volume MAX VOL.
AUTO
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected
loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume
range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “MAX
VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes
–80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.
AUTO
OFF
OFF
Input level
Input level
VOLUME: low
VOLUME: high
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Choice
AUTO
OFF
Functions
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Notes
Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level
is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX
VOL.” setting.
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume
setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and
“MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of
this unit next time.
y
• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal
sources by using “DYNAMIC RANGE” in “SOUND MENU”
• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.
Note
• Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE SET” to set the initial volume
level in Zone 2.
The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function
Initial volume INIT. VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone
when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Note
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume
setting.
89 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Graphic equalizer GEQ
3 SOUND MENU
Use this feature to adjust the audio parameters.
Use this feature to match the tonal quality of the center,
surround L/R and surround back L/R, and surround back
speakers with that of the front L/R speakers. You can
adjust 7 frequency bands (63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz,
2.5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, 16 kHz).
3 SOUND MENU
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)LIPSYNC
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
E)EXTD SUR.
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:Enter
A)EQUALIZER
2/2
A)EQUALIZER
1/2
TEST >OFF ON
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
TEST >OFF ON
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
.
.
2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz
0dB
0dB
0dB
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the
graphic equalizer.
Up/Down
Adjust
Up/Down
Select
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT
Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.
y
8
8
Press k / n to select a frequency band and l / h to adjust
the selected frequency band.
A)EQUALIZER
Note
EQ TYPE SELECT
AUTO PEQ >GEQ OFF
[NATURAL]
The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is
selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.
Select
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:Enter
Test tone TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while
Choice
Functions
8
listening to a test tone. To select “TEST”, press k / n
repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen.
Uses the parametric equalizer adjusted in
AUTO PEQ
A)EQUALIZER
1/2
Adjusts the built-in 7-frequency band graphic
equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speakers
GEQ
. TEST >OFF ON
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
8
matches. Press ENTER to display the graphic
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
0dB
equalizer screen.
0dB
0dB
0dB
Deactivates the equalizing feature.
OFF
Up/Down
Select
y
under “AUTO PEQ”.
Choice
OFF
Functions
Does not output test tones and output the
currently selected source component.
Note
Outputs test tones from the selected speakers.
You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO
automatically selected as the default setting.
ON
90 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Low-frequency effect level
B)LFE LEVEL
■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding bitstream signals.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input
signal contains the LFE channel.
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
SPEAKER;;;;;;;;;MAX
. HEADPHONE;;;;;;;MAX
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Select
[p]/[[]:
B)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
Speakers SPEAKER
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Adjust
[p]/[[]:
Headphones HEADPHONE
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the
headphones.
Speakers SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Choice
Functions
Headphones HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow
when this unit is decoding bitstream signals
(except Dolby TrueHD).
MIN/AUTO
• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according
to the instruction of the input source signals
when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD
signals.
Note
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 85),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
jack.
Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When
this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the
dynamic range control is always active
regardless of the instruction of the input source
signals.
STD
Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.
MAX
91 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Audio and video synchronization
(lip sync) D)LIPSYNC
Use this feature to adjust the audio and video
synchronization.
■ Extended surround E)EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the
connected surround back speakers.
D)LIPSYNC
E)EXTD SUR.
. HDMI AUTO;;;;;;OFF
AUTO;;;;;;;;;---ms
(offset;;;---ms)
. EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO
MANUAL;;;;;;;;;0ms
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Select
[p]/[[]:
Select
Return
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:
HDMI automatic lip sync mode HDMI AUTO
If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic
audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip
sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Activates the optimum decoder to play back
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit
recognizes a signal flag being input.
synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate
or deactivate the automatic lip sync.
Choices: ON, OFF
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.
PLIIxMovie
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music
decoder.
If the connected video monitor is compatible
with the automatic lip sync:
Select “ON”. Use “AUTO” to make fine adjustments of
the audio and video synchronization.
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-
ES decoder.
EX/ES
OFF
If the video monitor is not compatible with the
automatic lip sync or you do not want to use
the automatic lip sync:
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.
Select “OFF”. Use “MANUAL” to adjust the audio and
video synchronization.
Auto delay AUTO
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and
video synchronization when you set “HDMI AUTO” to
“ON”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
y
“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio
delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio
delay that you set in “AUTO”. This unit stores the value of
“offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync
compatible video monitors.
Manual delay MANUAL
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output
manually to synchronize audio with video images when
you set “HDMI AUTO” to “OFF”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
92 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Input/output assignment
I/O ASSIGNMENT
4 INPUT MENU
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input
source.
4 INPUT MENU
1/2
4 INPUT MENU
2/2
. A) SIRIUS
. H) V-AUX
I) DOCK
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
B)
C)
D)
XM
TUNER
CD
J) BLUETOOTH
R
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
K)
L)
M) MULTI CH
DVR
E) MD/CD-R
VCR
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
F)
G) DTV/CBL
Up/Down
DVD
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
Enter
[ENTER]:
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
Enter
K)
DVR
Input source
A)SIRIUS
Parameter
INPUT RENAME
*
. COMPONENT IN;;;[B]
COAXIAL IN;;;;NONE
OPTICAL IN;;;;NONE
HDMI IN;;;;;;;;[3]
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
VOL. TRIM
PARENTAL LOCK
Current( DTV/CBL )
Select
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]: Enter
B)XM
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
y
• “NONE” appears in the OSD when any input source is not
assigned to the input/output jack.
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the input/output jack
names that have been changed from their previous settings.
• The currently assigned input source for the selected input/
output jack appears in the OSD (“Current( DTV/CBL )” in the
display example above).
C)TUNER
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
M)MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
BGV
INPUT CH
FRONT
D)CD
E)MD/CD-R
F)DVD
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
DECODER MODE
G)DTV/CBL
H)V-AUX
K)DVR
L)VCR
I)DOCK
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
STANDBY CHARGE
J)BLUETOOTH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
START PAIRING
Note
Some parameters described above may not be available for all
input sources and some parameters are only available for specific
input sources.
93 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Input rename INPUT RENAME
Decoder mode DECODER MODE
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
Use this feature to switch the decoder activation mode.
When you select “DTS” and digital audio signals are
input, this unit always activates the DTS decoder and only
plays back the DTS digital audio signals.
K)
DVR
INPUT RENAME
D)
CD
DVR .
DVR
I/O ASSIGNMENT
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
Position
[p]/[[]:
Character
[ ]/[ ]:
[ENTER]:Enter
Return
. DECODER MODE;;;AUTO
[RETURN]:
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Select
[p]/[[]:
8
1
2
Press l / h to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Automatically detects digital audio signal input
types and selects the appropriate decoder.
8
Press k / n to select the character you
8
want to use and then press l / h to move
Activates the DTS decoder and plays back only
DTS digital audio signals when digital audio
signals are input.
DTS
to the next space.
Notes
Note
• You can use up to 9 characters for each input.
“DECODER MODE” is only available when the digital audio
input jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL, and/or COAXIAL) are assigned
to the selected input source.
8
• Press n to change the character in the following order,
8
or press k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock
PARENTAL LOCK
3
4
Repeat steps 1 through 2 to rename each
input source.
Use this feature to set the code number for locking the
desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting
the Parental Lock” on page 65 for details.
8
Press ENTER to complete.
Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode.
Volume trim VOL. TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This feature is useful if you want to balance the
level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in
volume when switching between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when
this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only
when this unit is turned on.
OFF
C)
TUNER
INPUT RENAME
. VOL. TRIM;;;;+6.0dB
Up/Down
Adjust
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the audio ZONE
OUT jacks.
94 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Start pairing START PAIRING
Choice
LAST
Functions
Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with
your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing,
Automatically selects the last selected video
source as the background video source.
Selects the corresponding input source as the
background video source.
DVD, DTV/
CBL, DVR,
VCR, V-AUX
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
Does not play the video source in the
background.
OFF
Input channels INPUT CH
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
Choices: 6CH, 8CH
8
1
2
Press ENTER to start pairing.
The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching
Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the
video monitor.
M) MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
. INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH
Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth adapter.
If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter,
“YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the
Bluetooth device list.
Up/Down
Select
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:
If the connected component outputs discrete
6-channel audio signals.
Select “6CH”.
3
Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth
device list and then enter the pass key
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.
Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,
“Pairing completed” appears.
If the connected component outputs discrete
8-channel audio signals.
Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right
channel signals output from the connected component
are input.
y
9
To cancel the pairing, press RETURN to exit from
“START PAIRING”.
9
Press RETURN to exit from “START
4
Front left and right channels input jack FRONT
If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel
signals output from the connected external decoder is
input.
PAIRING”.
Notes
• If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth
components, “Not found” appears.
• If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No
Bluetooth Adapter” appears.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR,
V-AUX
M) MULTI CH
Multi-channel input BGV BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;;;;8CH
.
FRONT;;;;;;;;;;;DVD
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:Select
M) MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
. BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH
Note
“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to
“8CH”.
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[ENTER]:Select
95 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
XM Satellite Radio information, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information, or iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a
certain operation.
5 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
5 OPTION MENU
Choice
Functions
. A)DISPLAY SET
B)VIDEO SET
C)MEMORY GUARD
D)INIT. CONFIG
E)HDMI SET
Displays the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
ON
F)ZONE2 SET
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Enter
[ENTER]:
Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
10S
Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
30S
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Note
Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
status information screen after you perform a certain
operation.
Use “VIDEO” of “INIT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set “OSD
SHIFT” to the factory presets (see page 109).
A)DISPLAY SET
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;;;0
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;+5
OSD-SOURCE;;;;;;30S
OSD-AMP;;;;;;;;;30S
FL SCROLL;;;;;;CONT
Choice
Functions
Displays the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
ON
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:Up/Down
Adjust
[p]/[[]:
Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
10S
Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
30S
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Control step: 1
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set the mode to display the XM
Satellite Radio information, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information, or iPod menu (such as song title or channel
name) in the front panel display.
8
•
•
Press l to make the front panel display dimmer.
Press h to make the front panel display brighter.
8
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Choice
CONT
Functions
Continuous mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
Scroll-once mode.
ONCE
8
•
•
Press l to lower the position of the OSD.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
8
Press h to raise the position of the OSD.
96 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Video settings B)VIDEO SET
■ Memory guard C)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound
field program parameter and other system settings.
Note
Use “VIDEO” of “INIT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the
parameters in “VIDEO SET” to the factory presets (see
page 109).
C)MEMORY GUARD
>OFF
ON
B)VIDEO SET
. VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON
[p]/[[]:Select
Return
[ENTER]:
Choice
OFF
Functions
Up/Down
Select
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:
Turns off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature.
Protects:
ON
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks.
– sound field program parameters
– “AUTO SETUP” items
– all speaker levels
– “MANUAL SETUP” items
Choice
Functions
Notes
• You can change the following parameters even if “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to “ON”:
Converts composite, S-video, and component
video signals interchangeably and up-converts
composite, S-video, and component video
signals to HDMI video signals.
ON
– “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 92)
– “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” (see page 94)
– “PARENTAL LOCK” in “INPUT MENU” (see page 94)
– “MEMORY GUARD”
Does not convert any signals.
OFF
• When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, “G ” appears at the
top right of the “SET MENU” screen.
Notes
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• You can change the settings of “SUR.” in the sound field
program parameter screen (see page 77) even if “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to “ON”.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted into component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
97 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Initial configuration D)INIT. CONFIG
Use this feature to select the settings of the audio input
jack select, active decoders and extended surround when
you turn on this unit.
■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET
Use this feature to select the component to play back
HDMI audio signals.
E)HDMI SET
D)INIT. CONFIG
S. AUDIO;;;;HTR-6160
. AUDIO SELECT;;AUTO
DECODER MODE;;AUTO
EXTD SUR.;;;;;AUTO
[p]/[[]:Select
Return
[ENTER]:
Select
[p]/[[]:
[ENTER]:Return
Support audio S.AUDIO
Audio select AUDIO SELECT
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this
unit.
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting (see page 44) for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power
of this unit.
Choice
Functions
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The
HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input
jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on
the rear panel of this unit.
HTR-6160
Automatically detects the type of input signals
and selects the appropriate audio input jack
select setting.
Automatically selects the last input jack select
setting used for the connected input source.
LAST
Plays back HDMI audio signals on another
HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT
jack.
OTHER
Decoder mode DECODER MODE
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode
(see page 94) for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
Notes
• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI
input jacks to the HDMI out jack only when this unit is turned
on even if “S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”.
• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the
connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of
each connected component.
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Automatically detects the type of input signals
and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.
Automatically selects the last decoder mode
setting used for the connected input source.
LAST
Extended surround EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode
(see page 92) for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
Choice
AUTO
Functions
Automatically detects the digital audio input
signals and activates the appropriate decoder.
LAST
Automatically selects the last decoder mode set
for “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU”.
98 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Zone 2 settings F)ZONE2 SET
F)ZONE2 SET
. MAX VOL.;;;+16.5dB
INIT. VOL.;;;;;OFF
Up/Down
[ꢀ]/[ꢀ]:
[p]/[[]:Adjust
Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
Zone 2.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Notes
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”
setting. For example, when “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and
then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of
this unit next time.
• The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the
“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.
Zone 2 Initial volume INI.VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the
power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Notes
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”
setting.
• When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS”, “Zone B”, or “NONE”
Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET”
parameter is not available.
• The “INI.VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the
“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.
99 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Remote control features
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 102).
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
■ Controlling this unit
Press AMP to control this unit.
■ Controlling a TV
Press DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your
5
4
5
5
AMP lights up for a few seconds after you press
AMP and any buttons (expect input selector buttons)
TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for
when the remote control is controlling this unit.
POWER POWER
STANDBY
SIRIUS
POWER
MUTE
TV
AV
A
XM
CD
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNER
POWER POWER
STANDBY
SIRIUS
POWER
MUTE
TV
AV
TV CH
A
XM
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
B
*1
CD
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNER
DTV/CBL
V-AUX/DOCK
AMP
TV CH
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
B
TV VOL
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
V-AUX/DOCK
AMP
SCENE
*1
TV VOL
1
2
3
4
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
BAND LEVEL
SRCH
MENU
MODE VOLUME
AMP
TITLE
SCENE
1
2
3
4
ENTER
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND LEVEL
TITLE
VOLUME
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
ENTER
REC
*2
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
INFO
REC
l
PROG
h
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
*2
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
INFO
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
9
SLEEP
ENT
0
10
l
PROG
h
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENT
9
0
10
Notes
*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether
Notes
4
you press DTV/CBL or not.
*1 These buttons always control this unit.
Remote control
Digital TV/Cable TV
*2
5
These buttons control this unit only when AMP is pressed.
*3
Turns on or off the power.
4
TV POWER
TV CH +/–
A or B is the optional component control area button. You
can control the desired component without changing the input
source of this unit.
Changes the channel number.
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV VOL +/–
Changes the input source.
Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
*2
4
These buttons control your TV only when DTV/CBL is
pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on
page 101.
y
You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate
remote control code for any input source selector buttons other
4
than DTV/CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons
highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source
selector button.
100 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
Press one of the input selector buttons (4) buttons to
control othercomponents. You must set the appropriate
remote control code for each input source in advance (see
page 102). The following table shows the function of each
control button used to control other components assigned
to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons
may not correctly operate the selected component.
SRCH MODE
MENU
VOLUME
BAND LEVEL
[2]
TITLE
[1]
POWER POWER
STANDBY
SIRIUS
POWER
MUTE
[7]
[8]
TV
AV
A
XM
ENTER
[3]
[4]
[5]
CD
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNER
RETURN
DISPLAY
MEMORY
TV CH
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
B
REC
V-AUX/DOCK
AMP
TV VOL
y
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
INFO
• The remote control has 13 modes (control areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 13
different components.
l
PROG
h
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
1
2
3
4
SCENE
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
[6]
1
2
3
4
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
9
SLEEP
ENT
0
10
[9]
• When you press one of the optional component control area
buttons (A and B), you can control the desired component
without changing the input source of this unit.
DVD player/
recorder
Digital TV/
Cable TV
MD/CD
recorder
Remote control
VCR
LD player
CD player
Tuner
[1] AV POWER
[2] TITLE
Power *1
Title
Power *1
Power *2
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
Band
[3] PRESET/CH k
Preset up (1-8)/
Tuning up
Up
VCR channel up Up
VCR channel
Preset down
(1-8)/Tuning
down
PRESET/CH n
Down
Down
down
Preset down
(A-E)
A-E/CAT. l
A-E/CAT. h
Left
Left
Preset up
(A-E)
Right
Right
ENTER
[4] RETURN
[5] REC
Enter
Enter
Hold
Return
Return
Memory
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
Rec *2
Play *2
Disc skip
Play
Rec
p
Play
Play
Play
Play
Search
backward
Searchbackward
*2
w
Search backward
Search backward Search backward Search backward Information
Search forward
*2
f
e
Search forward Search forward
Pause Pause
Skip backward Skip backward
Search forward
Pause
Search forward Search forward
Pause *2
Pause
Pause
Skip backward
*2
b
Skip backward
Skip backward
Skip backward
a
s
Skip forward
Stop
Skip forward
Stop
Skip forward *2 Skip forward
Stop *2 Stop
Skip forward
Stop
Skip forward
Stop
[6] 1-9, 0, +10
Preset stations
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons (1-8)/Numeric
buttons
[7] MENU
[8] DISPLAY
[9] ENT
Menu
Menu
Display
Enter
Search mode
Display
Display
Title/Index
Display
Enter
Display
Display
Index
Display
Index
Chapter/Time
Enter
Notes
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2 These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 102).
101 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control features
Setting remote control codes
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
G
Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) ( ) to
enter the four-digit remote control code for
the component to be used.
2
5
When the setting succeeds, AMP flashes twice;
5
however, when it does not, AMP flashes
repeatedly.
Remote control code default settings
Notes
Input
source
Component
category
Default
code
Manufacturer
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the
setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup
procedure.
A
XM
TUNER
TUNER
TUNER
CD
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
—
5012
5009
5017
5013
5001
5007
2000
—
SIRIUS
CD
■ Resetting all remote control codes
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory
settings.
MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD
CD-R
TUNER
DVD
5
While pressing and holding AMP on the
1
2
remote control, press AV POWER for
more than 3 seconds.
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
DVR
—
5
AMP flashes twice.
TUNER
DVR
Yamaha
Yamaha
Yamaha
5011
2011
5009
AMP
POWER
AV
B
TUNER
While holding
down
Press for 3
seconds
Note
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,
try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
AMP
flashes
1
While pressing and holding one of the input
4
selector buttons ( ) on the remote control to
6
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “9981”.
When the setting succeeds, AMP flashes twice;
2
select the control area you want to set up,
2
press AV POWER for more than 3
5
seconds.
5
however, when it does not, AMP flashes
5
AMP flashes twice.
repeatedly.
A
XM
SIRIUS
y
CD
MD/CD-R TUNER
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 1, the
clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing
procedure.
POWER
AV
DVD
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
B
Press for 3
seconds
V-AUX/DOCK
While holding down
AMP
flashes
102 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce
separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone
using the supplied remote control.
Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connecting Zone 2
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
•
•
An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.
An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
•
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to
use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
OUT
OUT
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha
component
Yamaha
component
This unit
■ Using the external amplifier
Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows.
From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks
Amplifier
Main zone
Second zone
(Zone 2)
Infrared signal receiver
Remote control
DVD player (etc.)
This unit
Infrared signal emitter
From the REMOTE IN jack
From the REMOTE OUT jack
Note
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
103 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Important safety notice
The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals and then set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to
FRONT B/ZONE2/
PRESENCE
R
EXTRA SP
L
Second zone
(Zone 2)
This unit
Main zone
y
• You can use the speakers connected EXTRA SP speaker terminals as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “EXTRA SP
• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone 2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume level and
Controlling Zone 2
You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are as follows:
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel
Turning on Zone 2
•
•
Selecting the input source of Zone 2.
I
Press ZONE CONTROL to turn on Zone 2.
Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source of Zone 2 (see page 53).
Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected
as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 57) (U.S.A. and
Canada models only).
•
•
•
Activating the Zone 2 operation mode
I
Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for
approximately 10 seconds.
Tuning into SIRIUS Satellite Radio when “SIRIUS” is
selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 62)
(U.S.A. and Canada models only).
Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source
ZONE2
Flashes
Note
You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is
flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is
automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal
operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection
procedure.
104 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2
operation mode.
control
Turning on Zone 2
Operating Zone 2
5
While pressing and holding AMP, press
R
Press INPUT l / h to select the desired input
source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in
the front panel display.
H
POWER.
While holding
down
•
Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER
features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER
operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 53.
Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM
Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about the
XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM Satellite
POWER
AMP
•
Operating Zone 2
•
Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations, see “SIRIUS
5
While pressing and holding AMP, press one of
4
the input selector buttons ( ) to select the
desired input source of Zone 2.
•
•
Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod
features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod
operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 68.
Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use Bluetooth
component features in Zone 2. For details about the
Bluetooth component operations, see “Using
Notes
J
E
MUTE and VOLUME +/– are available to control Zone2
with same procedure as mentioned above.
Setting Zone 2 to the standby mode
Set Zone 2 to the standby mode
5
While pressing and holding AMP, press
I
STANDBY to set ZONE 2 to the standby
H
Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the
standby mode.
mode.
y
L
Press SYSTEM OFF to set the main zone and Zone 2 to the
standby mode simultaneously.
105 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED SETUP
Advanced setup
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Notes
K
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn on this unit (see page 29).
K
L
M
N
• Only MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, SYSTEM OFF, TONE CONTROL and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you
are using the advanced setup menu.
• No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Using the advanced setup
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6ΩMIN
L
Press SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to
1
2
•
•
Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.
Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω.
set this unit to the standby mode.
M
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and
K
then press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn
on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
SP IMP.
Speaker
Impedance level
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Front
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 Ω or
While holding
down
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
TONE CONTROL
8ΩMIN
*
higher.
Center
Surround
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
N
3
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select
the parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
Surround back
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
SPꢀIMP.-8ꢀMIN
Front
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Currently selected
parameter
Currently selected
parameter setting
6ΩMIN
M
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to
Center
Surround
4
5
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
change the selected parameter setting.
L
Press SYSTEM OFF to save the new
setting and set this unit to the standby mode.
Surround back
*
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems
(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on
this unit.
106 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced setup
■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TU
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition.
See page 106 for the operation of the advanced setup.
■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition. This feature is useful when you
operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/
amplifiers in the same room separately.
Choices: ID1, ID2
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID code
is set to “5007”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID code
is set to “5016”.
Choices: ID1, ID2
Setting remote control TUNER ID codes
You need to set the remote control TUNER ID library
code for the remote control.
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is
set to “5019”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is
set to “5020”.
4
While pressing and holding TUNER on the
1
Setting remote control AMP ID codes
You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the
remote control.
2
remote control, press AV POWER for
more than 3 seconds.
5
AMP flashes twice.
TUNER
POWER
AV
5
While pressing and holding AMP on the
1
2
remote control, press AV POWER for
more than 3 seconds.
While holding
down
Press for 3
seconds
5
AMP flashes twice.
AMP
POWER
AV
While holding
down
AMP
Press for 3
seconds
flashes
AMP
G
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “5007” or “5016”.
2
5
When the setting succeeds, AMP flashes twice;
flashes
5
however, when it does not, AMP flashes
repeatedly.
G
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “5019” or “5020”.
2
Remote
control
TUNER ID *2
5
When the setting succeeds, AMP flashes twice;
TUNER ID
code *1
Function
5
however, when it does not, AMP flashes
repeatedly.
5007
To operate this unit using
ID1
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
(initial setting)
Remote
control AMP
ID *2
AMP ID
code *1
Function
5016
ID2
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit
5019
To operate this unit using
ID1
(initial setting)
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
5020
ID2
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit
107 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced setup
■ Remote control SIRIUS ID REMOTE SR
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the SIRIUS ID of this unit for
remote control recognition.
See page 106 for the operation of the advanced setup.
■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote
control recognition.
Choices: ID1, ID2
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control SIRIUS ID code
is set to “5017”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control SIRIUS ID code
is set to “5018”.
Choices: ID1, ID2
•
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID code is
set to “5009”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID code is
set to “5015”.
Setting remote control SIRIUS ID codes
You need to set the remote control SIRIUS ID code for the
remote control.
Setting remote control XM ID codes
You need to set the remote control XM ID code for the
remote control.
K
While pressing and holding SIRIUS on the
1
2
remote control, press AV POWER for
more than 3 seconds.
3
While pressing and holding XM on the
1
5
AMP flashes twice.
2
remote control, press AV POWER for
POWER
AV
more than 3 seconds.
SIRIUS
5
AMP flashes twice.
POWER
AV
While holding
down
Press for 3
seconds
XM
While holding
down
Press for 3
seconds
AMP
AMP
flashes
G
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “5017” or “5018”.
2
flashes
5
When the setting succeeds, AMP flashes twice;
G
Press the numeric buttons ( ) to enter the
code number “5009” or “5015”.
2
5
however, when it does not, AMP flashes
repeatedly.
5
When the setting succeeds, AMP flashes twice;
5
however, when it does not, AMP flashes
repeatedly.
Remote
control
SIRIUS ID *2
SIRIUS ID
code *1
Function
Remote
control XM
ID *2
5017
To operate this unit using
ID1
(initial setting)
XM ID code
*1
Function
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
5018
ID2
5009
To operate this unit using
ID1
(initial setting)
(initial setting) the default code.
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit
5015
ID2
*1 The remote control setting
*2 The setting of this unit
108 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced setup
■ Parameter initialization INIT
See page 106 for the operation of the advanced setup.
Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the
initial factory settings. You can select the category of
parameters to be initialized.
■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock
personal identification number reset
SR PIN
Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL
•
Select “DSP PARAM” to initialize all the parameters
of the sound field programs (see page 72).
Select “VIDEO” to initialize the parameters in
“VIDEO SET” (see page 97) and “OSD SHIFT” in
“DISPLAY SET” (see page 96).
Use this feature to set the code number (personal
identification number) for the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Parental Lock feature to the initial factory setting. This
feature is useful when you forget or want to change the
current code number.
•
•
•
Select “ALL” to initialize all the parameters of this
unit.
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization
procedure.
Choices: RESET, CANCEL
•
Select “RESET” to set the code number to the initial
factory setting.
Select “CANCEL” to set the code number to the initial
factory setting.
•
Notes
• The advanced setup menu parameters are not initialized.
• Use “INITIALIZE” in the sound field program menu to
initialize the parameters of the desired program (see page 72).
Note
Even if you set “SR PIN” to “RESET”, this unit does not unlock
the locked channels. The initial factory setting of the Parental
Lock code number is “0000”.
■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier
Choices: ON, OFF
•
Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier
function. “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE”
automatically, and this unit outputs the front channel
audio signals at the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
speaker terminals.
•
Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier
function.
Note
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, you can only select “FRONT B”
or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 85).
■ SCENE IR code setting SCENE IR
Use this feature to output the remote control signals at the
REMOTE OUT jack automatically when this unit is in the
SCENE mode.
Choices: ON, OFF
•
Select “ON” when the component connected to the
REMOTE OUT jack is the Yamaha component and has
the capability of the SCENE control signals. This unit
automatically sends the remote control signals to the
component.
•
Select “OFF” when the component connected to the
REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha component and
does not have the capability of the SCENE control
signals.
Note
If noises are output when you operate the SCENE function, set
“SCENE IR” to “OFF”.
109 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wires
for each connection do not touch anything other than
their respective connections.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning or cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use this
strong static electricity). unit normally.
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power
—
No sound.
Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
The optimizer microphone is connected.
Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while playing a source
encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control).
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
The front speakers to be used have not been
selected properly.
A
Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS
on the front panel repeatedly.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
Turn up the volume.
—
J
N
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output and then adjust the
volume.
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component, such unit.
as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
“S.AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” and
“HDMI” audio signals are not being played SETUP”.
back on this unit.
Set “S.AUDIO” to “HTR-6160” in “MANUAL
No picture.
The output and input for the picture are
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source
connected to different types of video jacks. components in the same way as you connect your
video monitor to this unit.
Non-standard video signals are input.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
—
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has turned this unit off.
The sound is muted.
Turn this unit on, and play the source again.
—
J
N
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output.
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”.
Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.
110 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
sound field program, the source signal is
directed to the center channel, and the front
and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”.
Try another sound field program.
One of the sound field programs (except
for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected.
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off.
O
Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting
other than “PRESENCE”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
“NONE”.
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and
a monaural source is being played back.
O
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting
“NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
other than “NONE”.
“SUR.B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”.
“NONE”.
Zone 2 speaker
settings are not
available in “SET
MENU”.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting
other than “ZONE2”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE2”.
FRONT B speakers
cannot be activated.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting
other than “FRONT B”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.
No sound from the
center, surround or
surround back
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to
“ZONE B”.
speakers when the
FRONT B speakers are
activated.
Presence speaker
settings are not
available in “SET
MENU”.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to a setting
other than “PRESENCE”.
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a
2-channel source is being played.
The source does not contain low-frequency
signals.
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in the
front panel display
does not light up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power of the component.
The sound effects
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effects
with a recording component.
111 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
INPUT jacks.
Some components cannot record Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
A source cannot be
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
recorded by an analog the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
IN jacks.
component connected
to the AUDIO OUT
(REC) jacks.
XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite
Radio signals are not output at the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks.
The sound field
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
—
parameters and some set to “ON”.
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
No sound is heard
from the connected
HDMI component.
The HDMI component does not accept the Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the
—
—
multi-channel audio signals.
2-channel audio signals at the source component such
as a DVD player.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
This unit is too close to the digital or high- Move this unit further away from such equipment.
frequency equipment.
frequency equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature is too high and the Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
—
overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
turn it back on.
■ HDMI
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
No picture or sound.
—
HDCP authentication failed.
Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
—
112 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ Tuner (FM/AM)
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
—
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot be
obtained even with a
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-
path interference.
—
FM
good FM antenna.
The desired station
cannot be tuned into with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
Previously preset
stations can no longer be long period.
tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
Preset the stations again.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into with connections are loose.
the automatic tuning
The signal is weak or the antenna
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and
orient the antenna for the best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
—
method.
AM There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noise can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
113 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ XM Satellite Radio
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock
CHECK XM TUNER
XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-
Tuner dock is not connected to this unit.
and check the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is connected
to this unit.
The XM antenna is not connected to the
XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM antenna
cable has become damaged.
Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock and check the antenna cable
for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is
damaged.
CHECK ANTENNA
LOADING
The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or This message should disappear in a few seconds in
program information from the XM satellite good signal conditions. If you see this message often,
signal. This message can also occur in
reposition the XM antenna to get better signal
weak XM signal conditions. Note that this reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in
unit may not respond to some operations
while this message is displayed.
the front panel or “XM Information” screen in the
video monitor to check the antenna reception level.
The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the
XM satellite signal. Something may be
blocking the XM antenna’s view of the
satellites or the antenna is not properly
aimed.
Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM
antenna to get better signal reception. Use the
“ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or
“XM Information” screen in the video monitor to
check the antenna reception level. See instructions
supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for
antenna installation information.
NO SIGNAL
The XM channel you selected is not
currently broadcasting.
Check back at a later time; in the mean time, select
another channel.
—
OFF AIR
You may be attempting to tune to an XM
channel that is blocked or that you cannot http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and
Consult the latest channel guide at
CH UNAUTH
receive with your XM subscription
package.
http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the
current list of channels. For information on receiving
this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ (US
residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian
residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at
1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-438-9677
(Canadian residents).
The selected channel is not available. The Consult the latest channel guide at
—
—
CH UNAVAIL
channel may have been reassigned to a
different channel number. This message
may occur initially with a new XM Mini-
Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not
received XM’s signal for an extended
period.
http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and
http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the
current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-
Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received
XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM
Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at
least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again.
No artist name or song title is available for No action required.
this selection.
- - - -
114 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
The antenna is not connected to the
SiriusConnect tuner properly.
Check the connection of the antenna and
SiriusConnect tuner.
ANTENNA ERROR
The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.
Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and
this unit.
CHECK SR TUNER
The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the AC wall outlet.
Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to
the AC wall outlet.
This unit does not support the connected
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit
supports,
NOT SUPPORTED
ACQUIRING
The signal is too weak.
Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the
SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”
information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS
Information” screen in the video monitor to check the
antenna reception level.
The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
channel list.
Wait until the updating is complete.
—
—
UPDATING
The period of the subscription is end.
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the
subscription.
The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
firmware.
Wait until the updating is complete.
F/W UPDATING
The selected channel is not subscribed.
Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the
selected channel.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
CALL SIRIUS
(CALL 888-539-
SIRIUS TO
SUBSCRIBE)
Select another channel.
The subscription information is updated.
SUB UPDATED
INVALID
The selected channel is currently out of
service.
Select another channel.
The operation you made is not available.
Not Available
■ Remote control
See
page
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
115 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ iPod
Note
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
This unit is in the middle of recognizing the
connection with your iPod.
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of acquiring song
lists from your iPod.
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
Connect error
Try resetting your iPod.
—
—
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
Unknown iPod
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-
10, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this unit
is complete.
iPod connected
Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal
Disconnected
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are
playable.
—
—
Unable to play
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
■ Bluetooth
See
page
Status message
Cause
Remedy
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of the pairing.
Searching...
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of establishing
the connection.
The paring is completed.
The paring is canceled.
Completed
Canceled
The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) and the Bluetooth component is
established.
BT connected
The Bluetooth component is disconnected
from the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such
as YBA-10, sold separately).
Disconnected
The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-
—
No BT adapter
BT Error
the DOCK terminal.
10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal.
This unit detects a problem of the
connected Bluetooth adapter.
Set this unit to the standby mode and then turn on
again.
116 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
See
page
Error message
Cause
Remedy
Optimizer microphone is not connected.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
Connect MIC!
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones.
—
Unplug HP!
The parameters of this unit are protected.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
Memory Guard!
During AUTO SETUP
See
page
Error message
Cause
Remedy
Front L/R channel signals are not detected.
A surround channel signal is not detected.
A presence channel signal is not detected.
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
Check the surround speaker connections.
Check the presence speaker connections.
E-1:NO FRONT SP
E-2:NO SUR SP
E-3:NO PRNS SP
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only a right surround back channel signal is Connect the surround back speaker to the
detected.
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS
terminal if you only have one surround back
speaker.
Background noise is too loud.
Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet
environment.
—
—
E-5:NOISY
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
E-6:CHECK SUR.
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting.
E-8:NO SIGNAL
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
E-9:USER CANCEL
An internal error occurred.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR
117 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
After AUTO SETUP
See
page
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message Check the speaker connections for proper
may appear depending on the speakers even polarity (+ or –).
when the speakers are connected correctly.
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
—
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
Check the speaker connections.
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
When “SWFR: TOO LOUD”or “SWFR:
TOO LOW” appears in the result screen, the
output volume of the subwoofer.
“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to
“PRESENCE”, though the presence channel
signals are not detected.
Check the presence speaker connections.
W-4:CHECK PRNS
Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to a setting other
than “PRESENCE”.
Notes
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.
• If a warning message “W-1”, “W-2” or “W-3” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If an error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
118 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
Notes
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup
menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
L
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press SYSTEM OFF on the front panel.
L
Press SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to
1
2
set this unit to the standby mode.
M
Press and hold TONE CONTROL and
K
then press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn
on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
While holding
down
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
TONE CONTROL
N
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to select
3
4
“INIT”.
M
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to
select “ALL”.
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
L
Press SYSTEM OFF to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
5
119 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLOSSARY
Glossary
■ Audio and video synchronization
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front
channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels,
Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an
additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low
Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is
counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum
volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-
channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
(lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical
term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining
audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and
transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires
complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an
automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices
to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately
without user interaction.
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter
section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a
restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each
amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely
to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass
filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a
cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency.
Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from
5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that
derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording.
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with
“fly-over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is
separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR
signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more
faithfully with this system because each of these signals is
independent. The component signal is also called the “color
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted
from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is
required in order to output component signals.
■ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed
for high-definition programming and media including HD
broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory
audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for
Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with
discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps,
Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for
the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby
Digital.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is
composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color,
brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a
video component transmits these three elements combined.
■ Deep Color
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays,
up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI
specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other
displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and
eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions
and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio
can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new
technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left
and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right
channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro
Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and
“Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-
channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There
are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only)
and “Game mode” for game sources.
120 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
■ Dolby Surround
■ DTS Express
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to
reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and
right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural),
and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The
surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency
range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The
Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume
on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and
directionality.
DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional
feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality,
low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet
applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio
feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD.
These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the
additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on
demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are
mixed down with the main audio stream on the player
component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to
the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or
analog connections.
■ Dolby TrueHD
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard
for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the
studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up
to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby
Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media
including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional
audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps
for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up
to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■ DSD
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD,
signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency
sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and
oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence
with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that
offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard
for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a
high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to
18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,
DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of
24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version
1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/
amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains
fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for
multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-
compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz
sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24”
refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality
transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel
sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a
set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a
digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-
definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a
single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video
interface that meets the security requirements of content
providers and system operators. For further information on
HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and
is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the
world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you
can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front
left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1
(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit
incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing
5.1-channel format.
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
121 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency
range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range
compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels
in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the
full-range channels with higher separation just like digital
discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround
technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for
digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in
surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic
frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more
detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and
localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from
5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio
signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any
compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and
DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the
size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for
“Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses
and then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency,
while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into
a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range
of rates that can be played back is determined based on the
sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound
level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In
principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range
of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y
signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance
through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates
video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback
of even more beautiful images.
■ x.v.Color
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a
more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression
of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining
compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color”
expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural
images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer
graphics.
122 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
Sound field program information
■ Elements of a sound field
■ SILENT CINEMA
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects
even without any surround speakers by using virtual
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that
does not include a center speaker.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit
enhances your listening experience by regenerating the
missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency
fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-
frequency bass is compensated, providing improved
performance of the overall sound system.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is
exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field
processor.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound
field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby
Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
123 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
• Volume Control ....................................... MUTE/–80 dB to 16.5 dB
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... 10 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. 10 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 110 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R, 8/6/4/2 Ω ..................................... 135/165/195/240 W
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F.
• Maximum Output Power [Russia model]
Speaker impedance setting: 8 Ω, 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω
.......................................................................................... 145 W
(FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP, SUR.B L/R SP:
SMALL/SML) ............................................................ 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct.
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω ....................................................................................... 1.4 dB
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format (Gray Back)
• IEC Output Power [Russia model]
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ................................... 105 W
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... NTSC
[Russia model] ........................................................................ PAL
• Damping Factor (IHF)
Front L/R, SPEAKERS A, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω
.................................................................................. 120 or more
• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
• Signal Level
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Voltage
CD, etc.
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD ............................... 2.3 V or more
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
• Signal to Noise Ratio
OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT ................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, FRONT SP: SMALL)
................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2 OUT ....................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
.................................................................................... 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, –3 dB
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Russia model] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, 10 Hz to 100 kHz
...................................................................................... +0/–3 dB
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
1 kHz, 100% MOD., Mono .............................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)
• Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to Front L/R
2ch Stereo, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω ............... 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
CD, etc. (Effect Off, 250 mV) to Front L/R
............................................................................ 100 dB or more
Mono/Stereo ......................................................................... 0.5%
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Russia model] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R
................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
124 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Russia model] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 400 W/500 VA
[Russia model] .................................................................... 440 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.8 W or less
[Russia model] .......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Russia model] ...................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 393 mm
(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 15-1/2 in)
• Weight .............................................................. 11.8 kg (26 lbs 4 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
125 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Index
Automatic tuning mode,
CHECK SR TUNER, SIRIUS Satellite
Radio status message ..................... 115
CHECK SUR., Automatic setup
CHECK XM TUNER, XM Satellite Radio
CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 31
CLASSICAL,
Completed,
Connect error,
■
Numerics
FM/AM tuning .................................53
Available decoders with Sound field
programs ..........................................77
2 VOLUME MENU, Manual setup ..... 81
■
B
B)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu ...............91
B)SP LEVEL, Basic menu ...................87
Bass cross over, Speaker settings .........87
BGV, Input menu .................................95
BGV, Input menu, Multi-channel input
BGV, Input menu .............................95
BI-AMP, Advanced setup ..................109
Bluetooth adapter connection ...............25
Bluetooth component playback ............70
Bluetooth component use .....................70
BT connected,
■
A
A)EQUALIZER, Sound menu ............. 90
A)SPEAKER SET, Basic menu ........... 85
AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) ............. 28
ACQUIRING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Action Game, Sound field program ..... 49
ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL,
Adaptive DSP level, Volume menu ..... 89
Adaptive dynamic range control,
Advanced setup .................................. 106
Advanced sound configurations ........... 72
ALL CH SEARCH, XM tuning ........... 59
All Channel Search mode,
iPod status message ....................... 116
Connect MIC!,
Connection,
Connection, Bluetooth adapter ............ 25
Connection, CD player ........................ 23
Connection,
CENTER PRE OUT jack ................ 24
Connection, DVD player ..................... 21
Connection, DVD recorder .................. 22
Connection, external decoder .............. 25
Connection,
FRONT PRE OUT jacks ................. 24
Connection, iPod universal dock ......... 25
Connection, Multi-format player ......... 25
Connection, Power cable ..................... 28
Connection, PVR ................................. 22
Connection, SiriusConnect tuner ......... 62
Connection, speaker cable ................... 16
Connection, SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
Connection,
Bluetooth status message ...............116
BT Error,
Bluetooth status message ...............116
■
C
C)DYNAMIC RANGE,
C)MEMORY GUARD,
C)SP DISTANCE, Basic menu ............88
Cable plugs ...........................................17
CALL SIRIUS, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
status message ................................115
CAT SEARCH, SIRIUS tuning ...........64
Category Search mode,
SIRIUS tuning ..................................64
CD player connection ...........................23
Cellar Club,
CENTER PRE OUT jack
connection ........................................24
CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............86
Center speaker level, Sound field
parameter .........................................77
Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........86
CENTER WIDTH,
Decoder parameter ...........................79
CH UNAVAIL, XM Satellite Radio
status message ................................114
Chamber, Sound field program ............48
CHECK ANTENNA, XM Satellite Radio
status message ................................114
CHECK PRNS, Automatic setup
All Channel Search mode,
AM tuning ............................................ 53
Amplifier function OSD display time,
ANTENNA ERROR, SIRIUS Satellite
Radio status message ..................... 115
Audio and video synchronization,
Audio components connection ............. 23
Audio information ................................ 46
Audio input jacks selection .................. 44
AUDIO SELECT,
Audio signal flow ................................. 19
Auto delay, Lip sync ............................ 92
AUTO SETUP, Troubleshooting ....... 117
Connection,
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ........ 24
Connection, TV monitor ...................... 20
Connection, XM Mini-Tuner Dock ..... 57
Controlling other components,
Remote control .............................. 101
Controlling this unit,
Remote control .............................. 100
CT LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 77
■
D
warning message ............................118
D)INIT. CONFIG, Option menu ......... 98
D)LIPSYNC, Sound menu .................. 92
126 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
DECODER MODE,
Decoder mode,
DECODER MODE,
DEVICE OVER,
DIALG.LIFT,
Dialogue lift,
Direct number access mode,
Direct number access mode,
Disconnected,
DSP effect sound level,
DSP LEVEL,
E-9:USER CANCEL,
Automatic setup error message ......117
EFFECT LEVEL,
Headphones, Dynamic range ............... 91
Headphones,
ENHANCER indicator .........................30
ENTERTAINMENT,
EQ, Auto setup parameter ....................33
Extended surround,
External amplifier connection ..............24
External decoder connection ................25
EXTRA SP ASSIGN, Auto setup
parameter ..........................................33
EXTRA SP ASSIGN,
Low frequency effect level .............. 91
■
I
I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ......... 93
INI.VOL., Zone 2 settings ................... 99
INIT.DLY,
Initial configuration,
Option menu .................................... 98
Initial delay,
Input channel and speaker
Extra speaker assignment,
Auto setup parameter .......................33
Extra speaker assignment,
INPUT MENU, Manual setup ............. 93
Input rename, Input menu .................... 94
Input source information display ......... 46
Input/output assignment,
■
F
F/W UPDATING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
status message ................................115
FM antenna ...........................................27
FM antenna connection ........................27
FM tuning .............................................53
Front input, Input menu ........................95
Front panel display ...............................30
Front panel display scroll,
Display settings ................................96
FRONT PRE OUT jack connection .....24
Input menu ....................................... 93
INTERNAL ERROR,
INVALID, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
iPod universal dock connection ........... 25
■
J
■
E
■
L
■
G
E-1:NO FRONT SP,
Automatic setup error message ...... 117
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR,
LEVEL ERROR, Automatic setup
LFE/BASS OUT,
Speaker settings ............................... 85
LIVE/CLUB,
Graphic equalizer, Equalizer ................90
■
H
Hall in Munich,
Hall in Vienna,
HDCP ERROR,
HDMI error message ........................46
HDMI ...................................................18
HDMI indicator ....................................30
HDMI set, Option menu .......................98
HDMI, troubleshooting ......................112
HEADPHONE, Dynamic range ...........91
HEADPHONE,
Automatic setup error message ...... 117
E-2:NO SUR SP, Automatic setup
E-3:NO PRNS SP, Automatic setup
E-4:SBR->SBL, Automatic setup
E-5:NOISY, Automatic setup error
E-6:CHECK SUR., Automatic setup error
E-7:NO MIC, Automatic setup error
E-8:NO SIGNAL, Automatic setup error
Sound field category ........................ 49
LIVENESS,
LOADING, XM Satellite Radio status
Loading..., iPod status message ......... 116
Low-frequency effect level,
Sound menu ..................................... 91
LVL, Auto setup result ........................ 34
127 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
OSD shift, Display settings ..................96
OSD-AMP, Display settings ................96
OSD-SOURCE, Display settings .........96
Other components controlling by remote
control ............................................101
Other components controlling, Remote
control ............................................101
OUT OF PHASE, Automatic setup
Pure Direct ........................................... 52
PVR connection ................................... 22
■
M
Manual delay, Lip sync ........................ 92
MANUAL SETUP ............................... 80
Manual setup ........................................ 80
MANUAL TUNING ............................ 53
Manual tuning mode,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 53
MAX VOL., Audio settings ................. 89
Maximum volume ................................ 89
Maximum volume, Audio settings ....... 89
Memory Guard!, Automatic setup error
message .......................................... 117
Memory guard, Option menu ............... 97
MOVIE, Sound field category ............. 49
MULTI CH INPUT component
Multi-channel source playback with
Multi-information display .................... 31
MUSIC ENHANCER,
■
R
Rear panel ............................................ 10
Remote control AMP ID,
Advanced setup ............................. 107
Remote control SIRIUS ID, Advanced
Remote control TUNER ID, Advanced
Remote control XM ID,
warning message ............................118
OVER 24m (80ft), Automatic setup
warning message ............................118
■
P
P.INIT.DLY,
Sound field parameter ......................74
P.ROOM SIZE,
Advanced setup ............................. 108
Remote control,
Sound field parameter ......................75
Parameter initialization,
Advanced setup ..............................109
Parametric equalizer type, Auto setup
parameter .........................................33
PARENTAL LOCK,
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 26
REMOTE SR, Advanced setup ......... 108
REMOTE TU, Advanced setup ......... 107
Repeat .................................................. 69
Resetting the system .......................... 119
REV.DELAY,
REV.LEVEL,
REV.TIME,
Reverberation delay, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 76
Reverberation level, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 76
Reverberation time,
Sound field category ........................ 50
Music Video, Sound field program ...... 49
Muting .................................................. 45
PL LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......77
Playing video sources
in the background .............................45
PLII Music, Decoder type ....................78
PLIIx Music, Decoder type ..................78
PR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......77
Presence left speaker level,
Sound field parameter ......................77
Presence right speaker level,
Sound field parameter ......................77
Presence sound field initial delay,
Sound field parameter ......................74
Presence sound field room size,
Sound field parameter ......................75
Presence speaker using .........................13
Preset channel setting,
Preset SCENE templates ......................39
Preset Search mode,
SIRIUS tuning ..................................64
PRESET SEARCH,
■
N
Neural Sur., Decoder type .................... 78
No BT Adapter,
Bluetooth status message ............... 116
NO FRONT SP, Automatic setup
error message ................................. 117
NO MIC, Automatic setup
error message ................................. 117
NO PRNS SP, Automatic setup error
message .......................................... 117
NO SIGNAL, Automatic setup error
message .......................................... 117
NO SIGNAL, XM Satellite Radio status
message .......................................... 114
NO SUR SP, Automatic setup error
message .......................................... 117
NOISY, Automatic setup
Roleplaying Game,
Sound field program ........................ 49
ROOM SIZE,
■
S
S.AUDIO, HDMI set ........................... 98
S.INIT.DLY,
S.LIVENESS,
S.ROOM SIZE,
SB INI.DLY,
error message ................................. 117
NOT SUPPORTED, SIRIUS Satellite
Radio status message ..................... 115
Number of speakers,
SB LEVEL,
Auto setup result .............................. 34
SB LIVENESS,
SB ROOM SIZE,
SBR->SBL, Automatic setup error
■
O
SIRIUS tuning ..................................64
PRESET SEARCH, XM tuning ...........59
PRESET TUNING ...............................53
Preset tuning mode,
FM/AM tuning .................................53
OFF AIR, XM Satellite Radio status
message .......................................... 114
OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 32
Option menu, Manual setup ................. 82
OSD SHIFT, Display settings .............. 96
128 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
SCENE IR code setting,
Searching...,
SPEAKER,
Speakers, Dynamic range .....................91
Speakers,
The Bottom Line,
Sound field program ........................ 49
The Roxy Theatre,
Sound field program ........................ 49
Troubleshooting ................................. 110
Tuner indicators ................................... 30
Tuner, Troubleshooting ..................... 113
Turning off ........................................... 29
TV monitor connection ........................ 20
Specifications .....................................124
SR LEVEL, Sound field parameter ......77
SR PIN, Advanced setup ....................109
Standby mode, Main zone ....................29
Standby mode, Zone 2 ........................105
START PAIRING, Input menu ............95
Straight .................................................51
Straight Enhancer,
SUB UPDATED, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
status message ................................115
SUBWOOFER PHASE,
Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ......87
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Selection, MULTI CH INPUT
■
U
Unable to play,
Setting SCENE template input source,
SIRIUS Parental Lock personal
iPod status message ....................... 116
UNIT, Speaker distance ....................... 88
Unit, Speaker distance ......................... 88
Unknown iPod,
iPod status message ....................... 116
Unplug HP!, Automatic setup error
UPDATING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio
USER CANCEL, Automatic setup error
identification number reset,
connection ........................................24
Supplied accessories ...............................2
Support audio, HDMI set .....................98
SUR.B L/R SP, Speaker settings ..........86
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jack
■
V
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock,
SIRIUS Satellite Radio,
Sound field programs
VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 26
Video conversion, Video settings ........ 97
Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 51
VOL. TRIM, Input menu ..................... 94
VOLUME level indicator .................... 30
Volume menu, Manual setup ............... 81
Volume Trim, Input menu ................... 94
connection ........................................24
Surround back left/right speakers,
Surround back sound field initial delay,
Sound field parameter ......................74
Surround back sound field liveness,
Sound field parameter ......................75
Surround back sound field room size,
Sound field parameter ......................75
Surround back speaker level,
Sound field parameter ......................77
Surround decode mode .........................78
Surround left speaker level,
Sound field parameter ......................77
Surround left/right speakers,
SURROUND PRE OUT jack
connection ........................................24
Surround right speaker level,
Sound field parameter ......................77
Surround sound field initial delay, Sound
Surround sound field liveness,
Sound field parameter ......................75
Surround sound field room size,
Sound field programs
Source feature OSD display time,
■
W
W-1:OUT OF PHASE, Automatic setup
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft), Automatic setup
W-3:LEVEL ERROR, Automatic setup
W-4:CHECK PRNS, Automatic setup
Speaker impedance,
■
X
XM Mini-Tuner Dock connection ....... 57
XM Satellite Radio .............................. 57
XM satellite radio tuning ..................... 57
XM Satellite Radio,
Sound field parameter ......................75
SYSTEM OFF ......................................29
■
T
Test tone, Equalizer ..............................90
129 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
■
Y
■
Z
Zone 2 Initial volume,
Zone 2 settings ................................. 99
Zone 2 Maximum volume,
Zone 2 settings ................................. 99
Zone 2 settings, Option menu .............. 99
Zone B .................................................. 43
ZONE2 indicator .................................. 31
A
4
SPEAKERS” or “ DVD”
“
(example) indicates the name of
the parts on the front panel or the
remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or the pages at the
end of this manual for the
information about each position of
the parts.
130 En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Front panel
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
VOLUME
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
BAND
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SCENE
MEMORY
INFO
ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
SYSTEM OFF
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO SELECT
OPTIMIZER MIC
ON/OFF
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Remote control
1
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
H
I
2
3
TV
AV
A
XM
SIRIUS
J
K
CD
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNER
TV CH
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
B
4
V-AUX/DOCK
AMP
L
TV VOL
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
5
6
SCENE
1
2
3
4
M
N
O
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND LEVEL
VOLUME
TITLE
7
8
9
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
REC
0
A
INFO
P
Q
R
l
PROG h
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
B
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
C
D
E
F
5
6
7
8
S
t
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENT
9
0
10
G
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of remote control codes
MBO
2078
2072
2072
2073
2072
2035
2075
2078
2077
2073, 2135
2075
2075
2074
2030, 2040, 2054,
2057, 2105, 2110
2019, 2026, 2046,
2073, 2081, 2090
2036, 2082
2077
2075
2031, 2042, 2050,
2051
2076
2074
2075, 2078, 2086
2077
2085
2074
2032, 2041, 2104,
2113
2074
2095
Yamaha
2000, 2001, 2003,
2030, 2101
2078
Microsoft
Mind
Niveus Media 2132
Northgate
Panasonic
2132
2132
Blu-ray player
Medion
Micromaxx
Micromedia
Microstar
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Mustek
Naiko
Onkyo
Orava
P&B
Pacific
Samsung
2137
Yukai
Zenith
2038, 2047, 2073
2132
2015, 2016, 2017,
2120
2117, 2121, 2123,
2128
2012, 2013, 2014
2129
CD player
DVD Recorder
Apex
JVC
LG
Yamaha
5000, 5013
2024
2070
2071
2020, 2065, 2066,
2067
2019, 2061, 2062,
2063
2021
2018
2022, 2064
2068
Philips
CD Recorder
Yamaha
5001
Pioneer
Proscan
RCA
Panasonic
DVD
Acoustic Solutions
2116, 2124, 2129,
2133
Philips
2078
ReplayTV
Sharp
Sonic Blue
Sony
2118, 2119, 2120
2009, 2010
2119, 2120
2005, 2006, 2007,
2122, 2130, 2131,
2132
2132
2132
2132
Aiwa
Akai
2055, 2100
2096
Panasonic
Pioneer
RCA
Sony
Toshiba
Yamaha
Yukai
Akura
2076
Philips
Alba
Apex
Awa
2078, 2086
2027, 2049
2078
Pioneer
Proline
Provision
RCA
2023
2069
Stack 10
Stack 9
Systemax
Tagar Systems 2132
Tivo
Axion
2078
DVD/LD
Pioneer
Brainwave
Brandt
Broksonic
Bush
Centrex
Classic
Clatronic
Coby
2096
2073, 2085
2060
2075, 2078, 2112
2077
2078
2036
Red Star
Reoc
Roadstar
Rowa
Saba
Sabaki
Samsung
2116, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2130, 2131
2004, 2125, 2132
2132
2133
2132
2132
2011
2132
DVD/VCR
JVC
LG
Panasonic
1017, 2045
1071, 2087
1020, 1072, 2040,
2105
Toshiba
Touch
UltimateTV
Viewsonic
Voodoo
2075
2078
C-Tech
CyberHome
Daewoo
Dansai
Daytek
DEC
2074
Philips
RCA
Samsung
Sharp
1025
2025, 2079, 2091
2092, 2098
2096
2080, 2089
2075
1022, 2042
1021, 2041, 2104
1023, 1073, 2043,
2106
1019, 1074, 2039,
2107
1024, 1075, 2044,
2108
1026, 2047
Yamaha
ZT Group
Sansui
Sanyo
ScanMagic
Scientific Labs 2074
Scott
SEG
Sharp
HD DVD
Toshiba
2078
Sony
2136
Denon
Denver
Diamond
DK Digital
Dual
2030, 2102, 2103
2075, 2076
2074
2094
2078
2088
iPod
Yamaha
2074, 2086
2034, 2043, 2059,
2093, 2106
2076
2074
2074, 2078
2076
Toshiba
5011
Zenith
LD player
Yamaha
Silva
Singer
DVD-DVR
Panasonic
Pioneer
Samsung
Toshiba
D-Vision
DVX
2096
2074
2002
Skymaster
Skyworth
SM Electronic 2074, 2078
2067
2114
2115
2068
MD
Yamaha
Elta
2096
Euroline
Funai
2096
2052, 2058
5002, 5003, 5004
Sony
2028, 2029, 2039,
2083, 2107
2074
2074
2074
2074
2075
2074, 2078
2052, 2058
2074
2072
2074
2076
2030
2096
2096
TAPE DECK
Yamaha
Global Solutions2074
Global Sphere 2074
DVR
ABS
Alienware
CyberPower
Dell
Soundmaster
Soundmax
Standard
Star Cluster
Starmedia
Supervision
Sylvania
Synn
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technics
Technika
Technosonic
Tevion
Thomson
Tokai
5005, 5006
Goodmans
Grundig
H&B
2075, 2077, 2078
2077, 2098
2075
2132
2132
2132
2132
2123, 2128, 2129,
2133
TUNER
Yamaha
5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5012, 5014,
5015, 5016, 5017,
5018
Haaz
2074
HE
2078
DIRECTV
Hitachi
2032, 2072
Home Electronics
2078
DISH Network 2126, 2127
TV
Acer
Acme
Acura
ADA
Dishpro
Echostar
Expressvu
Gateway
GOI
Hewlett Packard2132
Hitachi 2008
Howard Computers
2132
2126
2126, 2127
2126
2132
2126
Innovation
Irradio
JDB
2072
2134
2078
0093
0207
0208
0255
JVC
2033, 2045, 2053,
2073, 2099
2030, 2097
2075
ADC
Admiral
0206
Kenwood
Kingavon
Koda
2072, 2074
2085, 2109
2076
2026, 2044, 2048,
2056, 2073, 2108,
2111
0058, 0205, 0206,
0210, 0211
0200, 0207
0200
0206
0204
2075
Adyson
Agashi
Agazi
AGB
Lawson
Lenco
2074
2075
Toshiba
HTS
2126
2123, 2128
2123
Hughes
Humax
Hush
LG
Lifetec
Limit
2084, 2087
2072
2074
United
Voxson
2078
2078
2132
Aiko
0127, 0200, 0207,
0208
iBUYPOWER 2132
LogicLab
Luxor
2074
2077
Wharfedale
Xlogic
2074
2074
JVC
Linksys
2126, 2127
2132
Aiwa
0028, 0139, 0229,
0237
Magnavox
Magnum
2037, 2073, 2075
2072
Yakumo
Yamada
2077
2077
Media Center PC
2132
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Akai
0059, 0065, 0127,
0129, 0130, 0200,
0204, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218,
0255
0209, 0218
0206, 0209, 0218
0200
0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0217, 0218
0212
0213
0207
Cascade
Cathay
CCE
Celebrity
Centurion
Century
CGE
0208
0213, 0217
0127
0059
0213, 0217
0205
0214, 0215
0208, 0218
0060, 0061, 0062,
0064
Envision
Erres
ESA
0060, 0061
0213, 0217
0080
0208
0206
Hisawa
Hitachi
0209, 0218
0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0060,
0061, 0095, 0105,
0127, 0156, 0179,
0180, 0204, 0207,
0210, 0211, 0215,
0216, 0251
0213
0209, 0218
0200, 0207
0200, 0207
0200, 0207, 0208,
0214, 0215
0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
0127, 0200, 0206,
0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
0200, 0218
0062
0211, 0213, 0214,
0215
0213, 0217
0063
0211
0208
0201, 0204, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
0206, 0208
0208, 0214
0205, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0216, 0217
0200
0206, 0207, 0218
0201, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218
0209, 0218
0207, 0215
0200, 0209, 0213,
0218
0129, 0208, 0211
0208, 0217
0063
0057, 0060, 0061
0059
0060, 0061
Etron
Euro-Feel
Euroline
Euroman
Euromann
Europhon
Akiba
Akura
Alaron
Alba
0217
0200
Cimline
Citizen
0206, 0207, 0213
0200, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0215
0208
0212, 0217, 0226
0200, 0207, 0210
0210
0204, 0205, 0207,
0213, 0215, 0217
0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214
0064, 0127, 0128,
0205, 0207, 0215
0213, 0218
0200, 0205, 0207,
0215, 0217
Hornyphon
Hoshai
Huanyu
Hygashi
Hyper
ALBIRAL
Allstar
Amplivision
Amstrad
City
Clarivox
Clatronic
0208
Fenner
0212, 0217
0206, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0213, 0214,
0218
Ferguson
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
0204, 0206, 0208,
0209, 0218
0062
Hypson
ICE
Amtron
Anam
Anam National 0062
CMS
0200
0208
Colortyme
Concerto
Concorde
Condor
Contec
Contec/Cony 0062
Continental Edison
0216
Cosmel
Craig
Crosley
Crown
0060, 0061
0060, 0061
0208
0200, 0207, 0213
0200, 0207, 0208
Firstline
Fisher
Anglo
0208
Anitech
Ansonic
AOC
0206, 0208
0203, 0208
0060, 0061
0118, 0122, 0132
0216
0200
0207
0213, 0217
0205, 0211
0213
ICeS
IMA
Imperial
Flint
Formenti
Apex
Arc en Ciel
Arcam
Arcam Delta
Aristona
ASA
Asberg
Astra
Asuka
Formenti-Phoenix
0200
Fortress
Indiana
Infinity
Ingelen
Ingersol
Inno Hit
0208
0062
0205, 0214, 0215
0062, 0063, 0128,
0208, 0213, 0217
0205
0206, 0208, 0210,
0211, 0214
0023, 0024, 0025,
0088, 0127
0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0062,
0206
Frontech
Fujitsu
Funai
0208
CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209,
0214, 0218
CTC
Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064, 0065
CXC
0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
Innovation
Interbuy
Interfunk
0214
Atlantic
Futuretech
Gateway
GBC
0062
0094
Atori
Audiosonic
0208
0062
International
Intervision
Irradio
0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0216, 0217,
0218
0207
0062
0205, 0206, 0207
0200
0216
Cybertron
Daewoo
0209, 0218
0060, 0061, 0120,
0127, 0155, 0193,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0218, 0238
0200, 0209, 0218
0200, 0206, 0213,
0217
0217
0060, 0061, 0208
0210
0204, 0207, 0213,
0217
0213, 0217
0200
0057
0208, 0213, 0217
0208
0207, 0215, 0216
0207, 0208, 0215
0060, 0127, 0205,
0207
0126
0217
0213, 0217
0203, 0204, 0212,
0218
0208, 0215, 0218
0057, 0060, 0061,
0122, 0147
0204, 0207, 0211,
0213, 0217
GE
AudioTon
Audiovox
Autovox
Awa
Baird
Bang & Olufsen 0205
GEC
Isukai
ITC
ITS
Dainichi
Dansai
Geloso
General Technic 0208
Genexxa
0208, 0210, 0215
0209, 0211, 0213,
0218
0060
0200
ITT
ITV
JBL
JC Penney
JCB
Dantax
Daytron
De Graaf
Decca
Basic Line
0208, 0209, 0213,
Gibralter
GoldHand
GoldStar
0218
0207
0217
0228
0060
Bastide
Baur
Beko
0060, 0061, 0127,
0128, 0200, 0201,
0207, 0208, 0210,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
0171, 0201, 0204,
0206, 0208, 0213,
0217, 0240
0209, 0218
0211
0204, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217
0208, 0209, 0217
0128, 0130, 0222,
0236, 0255
0062
0200, 0206, 0207
0060, 0061
0200, 0207
0203, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0215, 0217
0204, 0208
0062
Jensen
JVC
Desmet
Diamond
Dimensia
Dixi
DTS
Dual
0017, 0018, 0019,
0108, 0136, 0153,
0178, 0190, 0213,
0218
0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0218
0207
0200, 0207
0211
0207, 0208, 0212,
0217
0059, 0060, 0061,
0200
0128, 0210
0215
0060, 0061
Belcor
Bell & Howell 0058, 0064
Benq
Beon
Bestar
Binatone
Black Star
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Bondstec
Boots
0081
0213, 0217
0213
0207
0214
0255
0209, 0218
0214
0207
0062
0216, 0226
0205, 0213, 0217
0200, 0207
0060
0138
0205
Goodmans
Kaisui
Dual-Tec
Dumont
GPM
Graetz
Granada
Kamosonic
Kamp
Kapsch
Durabrand
Dux
Dynatron
Elbe
Karcher
Grandin
Grundig
Kawasho
Bradford
Brandt
Grunpy
Halifax
Hallmark
Hampton
Hanseatic
Kendo
Kennedy
Kenwood
Kingsley
Kloss Novabeam
Brionvega
Britannia
Brockwood
Broksonic
Bruns
BSR
BTC
Bush
Elbe-Sharp
Elcit
ELECTRO TECH
0208
Electroband
Electrohome
Elin
0204
0204, 0205
0200, 0207
0059
0062
0203
0213
0209, 0218
0213, 0217
0205
0208
0062, 0127, 0207
0200, 0212
0215
0059, 0060, 0061
0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
0209, 0213, 0218
0215
0200, 0208
0060, 0061, 0062,
0064, 0128, 0205
Hantarex
Harvard
HCM
Kneissel
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Korting
Koyoda
KTV
0209, 0218
0177, 0208, 0209,
0210, 0213, 0215,
0216, 0217, 0218,
0230, 0237
0060, 0061
0206
0206, 0207, 0208,
0218
0216
0200
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Elite
Elman
Elta
Hifivox
Higashi
Hinari
Candle
Capsonic
Emerson
Kyoto
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lenco
Lenoir
Lesa
Leyco
LG
0208
0207, 0208
0214
NEC
0026, 0053, 0060,
0061, 0096, 0127
0205, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217, 0255
0213, 0217
0214
0082, 0101
0208, 0213
0209, 0218
0200, 0207
0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0213, 0217,
0218
0061
0200, 0207
0216
0129, 0211
0205, 0211, 0213,
0216
0217
0211
0084
0207
0062, 0218
0213
0126, 0204, 0208,
0213, 0217, 0235
0218
0182, 0194, 0195,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217, 0250
0206, 0213
0075
Sanyo
SBR
SCHAUB LORENTZ
0211
Schneider
0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0060, 0064,
0127, 0128, 0200,
0203, 0207, 0215
0217
Neckermann
0206, 0213, 0217
0016, 0038, 0039,
0127, 0128, 0157,
0158, 0163, 0164,
0166, 0188, 0189,
0200, 0201, 0207,
0208, 0210, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
0217
Plantron
Polaroid
Poppy
NEI
Nesco
0208
0060, 0061
NET-TV
New Tech
New World
Nicamagic
Nikkai
Portland
Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210
0207, 0209, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0218
Precision
Prima
Profex
Profi-Tronic
Proline
Proscan
Prosonic
Protech
0207
0208, 0211
0208
0213
0213
Scotch
Scott
Sears
0061
Liesenk
Life
Lifetec
Loewe
0060, 0061, 0062
0057, 0060, 0061,
0064
0200, 0206, 0207,
0214, 0215, 0217
0204
0206, 0208
0206, 0208, 0218
0063, 0128, 0203,
0204, 0223, 0227
0205, 0213, 0217
0058
0210, 0217
0210, 0213, 0217
0213
Nikko
0057
Nobliko
Nogamatic
Nokia
0200, 0207, 0217
0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
0060, 0061
0217
0060
0213, 0217
0208
0152, 0214
0201, 0206, 0207,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
0218
0064
SEG
SEI
Loewe Opta
Logik
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May
Luxman
Luxor
Nordmende
SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211
Proton
Provision
Pulsar
Pye
Pymi
Quasar
Quelle
Seleco
Sencora
Sentra
Serino
Sharp
0210, 0211, 0215
0208
0218
Nordvision
Oceanic
Olevia
ONCEAS
Onwa
0060, 0061
0200
0201, 0207, 0210
0057, 0061, 0063,
0064
0204, 0205, 0214,
0215, 0217
0200, 0204, 0207
0060, 0061, 0063,
0102, 0103, 0150
0206, 0208
0009, 0010, 0011,
0060, 0061, 0066,
0070, 0087, 0111,
0143, 0145, 0167,
0168, 0169, 0198,
0204, 0224, 0247,
0248, 0249
0060
0204, 0205, 0215
0212
0255
0213
0058
LXI
Orbit
Orion
Magnadyne
Magnafon
Magnavox
Orline
Orsowe
Osaki
Radialva
Radio Shack
0204
0127, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
0201
0209, 0218
0218
Radio Shack/Realistic
0057, 0060, 0061,
Shogun
Siarem
Sicatel
Siemens
Sierra
Signature
Silva
Singer
Magnum
Majestic
Mandor
Manesth
0058
0206
Osio
Oso
Osume
0062, 0064
0213, 0217
Radiola
0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
0060, 0061, 0063,
0090, 0213, 0217
0205
0200, 0213, 0217
0204, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0213, 0217
0213, 0217
Radiomarelli
Radiotone
RCA
0204, 0205, 0214
0213
0057, 0060, 0061,
0091, 0133, 0135,
0147, 0149
0064
0213, 0217
0206, 0210, 0211
0203, 0205
0200
0213, 0217
0206, 0208, 0209,
0218, 0237
0205
0200
0205
0204, 0205, 0211,
0216
0212
0204, 0206, 0207,
0208
Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0255
Pael
Palladium
Panama
Marantz
0200
0205, 0214, 0215
0204, 0205, 0215,
0217
0211
0211
0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0217
0211
0213, 0217
0041, 0059, 0067,
0085, 0086, 0174,
0196, 0199, 0208,
0219, 0234
Marelli
Mark
Matsui
0200, 0207
0207
0200, 0206, 0207,
0208
0006, 0007, 0063,
0073, 0074, 0097,
0110, 0114, 0137,
0141, 0151, 0162,
0165, 0186, 0204,
0211, 0244, 0245,
0246, 0254
Sinudyne
Realistic
Revox
Rex
Skantic
Solavox
Sonoko
Mediator
Medion
Megatron
Melectronic
Panasonic
RFT
0206, 0208
0061
Rhapsody
R-Line
Roadstar
Sonolor
Sontec
Sony
0200, 0207, 0208,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217
0058, 0061, 0064,
0208
0208
0205
0060, 0061
0206, 0208
0206, 0208
0204
0213
0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0060, 0061,
0104, 0112, 0113,
0125, 0205, 0213
0200, 0201, 0202,
0203, 0204, 0207
Robotron
Rowa
RTF
Memorex
Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207,
0212, 0215
Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216
Pausa
Perdio
Philco
Memphis
Metz
MGA
Micromaxx
Microstar
Minerva
Minoka
Saba
Sound & Vision 0209, 0218
Soundesign
Soundwave
SSS
0060, 0061, 0062
0208
0200
0060, 0061, 0063,
0128, 0205, 0214,
0215
saccs
Saisho
0213, 0217
0060, 0062
0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
0217
Standard
Salora
0201, 0204, 0210,
0211, 0215
0204
0060, 0061, 0083,
0101
Starlight
Starlite
Stenway
Stern
Mitsubishi
Philharmonic 0207
Philips 0040, 0060, 0063,
Sambers
Sampo
0062
0218
0072, 0115, 0116,
0124, 0130, 0150,
0175, 0184, 0187,
0205, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0217, 0220,
0221, 0232, 0233,
0252, 0253
0210, 0211
0208, 0218
0208, 0213
0200, 0204, 0207
0200
0208
0059
0209
0208
0200, 0207
0060, 0061, 0063,
0080, 0134, 0142,
0148
0062, 0080
0217
Samsung
0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0060,
0061, 0065, 0068,
0069, 0071, 0079,
0087, 0127, 0128,
0130, 0144, 0160,
0161, 0170, 0176,
0183, 0185, 0200,
0201, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0213, 0217,
0239, 0241, 0242,
0243
Sunkai
Mivar
Sunwood
Superla
SuperTech
Supra
Supreme
Susumu
Sutron
Montgomery Ward
0058
MTC
0060, 0061, 0128,
0200
Philips Magnavox
0124
Phoenix
Multi System 0217
Multitech
0062, 0127, 0128,
0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
Sydney
Sylvania
0200, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0215,
0217
0200, 0207
0061
Phonola
Murphy
NAD
Naonis
Pilot
Pioneer
0060
Symphonic
Sysline
Sytong
0012, 0013, 0060,
0061, 0098, 0109,
0117, 0128, 0181,
Sandra
Sansui
0200, 0207
0123, 0126, 0213
0210
0200
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tandy
0127, 0207, 0209,
0211, 0218
0200, 0207, 0210
0127, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0217, 0237
0206, 0208
0127
0207, 0208, 0214,
0215
0060, 0061
0058, 0060, 0061,
0062
0216
0218
0065, 0213, 0216
0218
0208, 0214, 0217
0207
Weltblick
Weston
White Westinghouse
0200, 0207, 0217
0213, 0217
0215
Alba
1044, 1050
GoldHand
Goldstar
1050
1000, 1003, 1042,
1045
1042, 1045, 1050,
1069
1005
1043, 1047
1046, 1047, 1049
1042, 1045, 1050
1046, 1050, 1062
1045, 1046
American High 1004
Tashiko
Tatung
Amstrad
Anitech
ASA
Asha
Asuka
1042
1050
1045, 1046
1002, 1014
1042, 1045, 1046,
1050
Goodmans
Yamaha
0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0004, 0005,
0060, 0061
TCM
Teac
Tec
Gradiente
Graetz
Granada
Grandin
Grundig
Hanseatic
Harley Davidson1005
Harman/Kardon 1000
Harwood
HCM
Yamishi
Yoko
0218
0200, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
0209, 0218
0210
0058, 0060, 0100,
0105, 0119, 0121,
0154
Audio Dynamics1000
Audiovox
Baird
Basic Line
Baur
Beaumark
Techwood
Teknika
1003
1042, 1043, 1047
1044, 1050
1046
Yorx
Zanussi
Zenith
Teleavia
Telecor
Telefunken
Telegazi
Teletech
Teleton
1002, 1014
1006
1050
1001
1044, 1050
1044
1007, 1010, 1039,
1042, 1043, 1046,
1049
Bell & Howell 1001
Blaupunkt
Broksonic
Bush
1046, 1048
Headquarter
Hinari
Hisawa
Hitachi
1012, 1013
1044, 1050, 1066
1003
1002, 1003
1004
TV/DVD
Aiwa
Apex
Broksonic
Bush
Televideon
Tensai
0200
0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
0139, 2055
0132, 2049
0138, 2060
0230, 2112
0136, 2053
0137, 0254, 2054,
2110
0133, 0135, 2050,
2051
0134, 2052
0226, 2109
0131, 0231, 2048,
2111
Calix
Candle
Canon
CCE
Tesmet
Tevion
Texet
0213
1006
Hughes Network Systems
1010
Hypson
Imperial
Inno Hit
Innovation
0206, 0208
0200, 0207
0191, 0192, 0207,
0213, 0216, 0226
0212, 0217
0060, 0061
0213
0200, 0207
0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0064, 0078,
0089, 0090, 0106,
0107, 0127, 0131,
0140, 0146, 0159,
0197, 0225, 0231,
0237
0211, 0215
0200
0204
0218
0204
0211, 0213
0200, 0205, 0207,
0214, 0215
0217
0127, 0128, 0129,
0201, 0206, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
0212
0210, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
0208, 0217
0213
JVC
Panasonic
CGE
1042, 1043
1044, 1050
1002, 1003
1000
1006
1002, 1003, 1006,
1014
Cimline
Citizen
Colortyme
Colt
1044, 1050
1042
1046, 1050
1044, 1048
Thomson
RCA
Thorn
TMK
Tokai
Tokyo
Toshiba
Sylvania
Thomson
Toshiba
Craig
Instant Replay 1004
Interbuy
Interfunk
Intervision
Irradio
ITT
ITV
1045
1046, 1047
1042
1045, 1050
1043, 1047
1045
1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1006
1004
Crown
1050
Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004,
1009
Cybernex
Daewoo
TV/DVD/VCR
Panasonic
Samsung
Sharp
Sylvania
Toshiba
1002, 1014
1005, 1038, 1061,
1067
1050
1044
0141, 1040, 2057
0241, 1070, 2113
0143, 1028, 2059
0142, 1041, 2058
0140, 1029, 2056
JC Penney
Dansai
Dantax
DBX
De Graaf
Decca
Denon
Dimensia
Dual
JCL
Jensen
JVC
Towada
Transtec
Trident
Tristar
Triumph
Uher
1000
1007
1046, 1049
1042, 1043, 1046
1010
1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1017, 1036,
1043
1050
1046
TV/VCR
Aiwa
Bush
Daewoo
0237, 1066
0237, 1066
0155, 0238, 1038,
1067
1009
Kaisui
Karcher
Kendo
1043, 1046
1042, 1046, 1047,
1049
1005
1003
Ultravox
Dumont
1044
GE
0147, 1030
0240, 1069
0236, 1062
0156, 1039
0153, 1036
0150, 1033
0235, 1065
0151, 1034
0150, 0232, 0233,
1033, 1062, 1063
0152, 1035
0149, 1032
0237, 1066
0144, 0239, 1027,
1068
Kenwood
1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043
1006
1003, 1004
1050
1050
1003, 1042, 1045,
1071
1044, 1048
1005
1048
1045, 1046
1006, 1050
1047
United
Universum
Goodmans
Grundig
Hitachi
JVC
Magnavox
Orion
Dynatech
Electrohome
Electrophonic 1003
Elta
KLH
Kodak
Korpel
Leyco
LG
1050
Univox
Vestel
Emerson
1003, 1004, 1005,
1012, 1013
1050
1043
1042
1046, 1047, 1049
1042, 1043, 1046,
1047, 1049
Panasonic
Philips
Etzuko
Vexa
Victor
Ferguson
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
Lifetec
Lloyd's
Loewe
Loewe Opta
Logik
Luxor
LXI
M Electronic 1042
Magnasonic
Magnavox
Magnin
Manesth
Marantz
VIDEOLOGIC 0200
Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209,
0218
Videosat
VideoSystem 0213
Videotechnic 0200
Quasar
RCA
Roadstar
Samsung
0214
FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049,
1050
Fisher
Flint
Formenti/Phoenix
1046
Fuji
Fujitsu
Funai
Galaxy
Garrard
GBC
1003
Sharp
Sony
Sylvania
Tatung
Toshiba
0145, 1028
0234, 1064
0148, 1031
0237, 1066
0146, 0237, 1029,
1066
1001, 1047
1044
Vidtech
Viewsonic
0060, 0061
1047
0076, 0077, 0092,
0099, 0172, 0173
0200, 0207
0213
0213, 0217
0205, 0210, 0211,
0213
0207, 0212
0057, 0058, 0060,
0061, 0063
0213, 0217, 0218
0200, 0207, 0212,
0215
1004, 1018, 1033
1003, 1014
1050
1000, 1001, 1004,
1046, 1051
1003
1044, 1045
1004
1046
Visiola
Vision
Vortec
Voxson
1004
1042
1005, 1042
1042
1005
Zenith
0154, 1037
Marta
VCR
Admiral
Adventura
Aiwa
Matsui
Matsushita
Mediator
Medion
MEI
Waltham
Wards
1008, 1013
1005
1005, 1042, 1043,
1044, 1066
1007, 1043
1050
1050
GE
1002, 1004, 1009,
1014, 1030
1046
1044, 1048
1004
Watson
Watt Radio
GEC
Geloso
General Technic 1044, 1048
Go Video 1014
Akai
Akiba
Akura
1050
Wega
0205
1043, 1050
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memorex
1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008,
1013, 1014, 1042,
1045, 1047
1050
Randex
RCA
1003
Towada
Towika
Uher
Unitech
Universum
1050
1050
1045
1002, 1014
1042, 1045, 1046
1002, 1004, 1009,
1010, 1014, 1015,
1022, 1032
1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
1043
Memphis
Metz
MGA
Realistic
1048
1014
Vector Research 1000
Video Concepts 1000
Rex
MGN Technology
1002, 1014
RFT
Roadstar
Saba
Saisho
Salora
Samsung
1046
1045, 1050, 1066
1043
1044, 1050
1047
1002, 1014, 1021,
1027, 1052, 1068,
1070
1008
1007, 1011, 1013,
1043
1001, 1002, 1014,
1047
1046
Videon
Videosonic
Wards
1044, 1048
1002, 1014
1002, 1003, 1004,
1005, 1006, 1008,
1010, 1014
Micromaxx
Microstar
Migros
1044, 1048
1044, 1048
1042
Minolta
1010
Weltblick
White Westinghouse
1013
XR-1000
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
1045
Mitsubishi
1011, 1042, 1046
Montgomery Ward
1008
Sanky
Sansui
1004, 1005, 1006
1000, 1001, 1007
1050
1050
1045, 1050
1013, 1026, 1037
Motorola
MTC
Multitech
1004, 1008
1002, 1014
1002, 1005, 1006,
1042, 1046, 1050
1042
Sanyo
SBR
Yoko
Zenith
Murphy
National
NEC
1048
Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047
Schneider
1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043, 1051
1043, 1046
1046
1042, 1044, 1045,
1046, 1050
1012
1001, 1003, 1004,
1010
Neckermann
NEI
Scott
Sears
Nesco
1050
Nikko
1003
SEG
1050
Noblex
Nokia
Nordmende
Oceanic
Okano
Olympus
Optimus
Orion
1002, 1014
1043, 1047
1043
1042, 1043
1044
SEI-Sinudyne 1046
Seleco
Sentron
Sharp
1043
1050
1008, 1023, 1028,
1053, 1073
1006, 1047, 1050
1045
1004
Shintom
Shivaki
Shogun
Siemens
1003, 1008
1012, 1013, 1044,
1065
1002, 1014
1045, 1047
Orson
Osaki
1042
1042, 1045, 1050
Signature 2000 1008
Silva
1045
Otto Versand 1046
Singer
Sinudyne
Sontec
Sony
1004, 1006
1046
1045
1016, 1019, 1055,
1060, 1064, 1074
1004, 1010
1044
1042
1042
1050
1004, 1005, 1031,
1041
Palladium
Panasonic
1043, 1045, 1050
1004, 1020, 1034,
1040, 1048, 1054,
1072
Pathe Marconi 1043
STS
Sunkai
Sunstar
Suntronic
Sunwood
Sylvania
Penney
Pentax
Perdio
Philco
Philips
1010, 1014
1010, 1049
1042
1004, 1051
1004, 1025, 1033,
1046, 1056, 1057,
1059, 1062, 1063
Symphonic
Taisho
Tandy
1005
1044
1001
Philips Magnavox
1018
Phonola
Pilot
Pioneer
Prinz
1046
1003
1011, 1046
1042
1050
1014
1042
1009
1044
1006
1046, 1056
1001
1001, 1047
1004, 1035
1042, 1046, 1047
1003
Tashiko
Tatung
1003, 1042
1007, 1042, 1043,
1046, 1066
1044, 1048
1005, 1007
1004, 1048
1003, 1004, 1005
1043
TCM
Teac
Profex
Profitronic
Proline
Proscan
Prosonic
Protec
Technics
Teknika
Teleavia
Telefunken
Tenosal
Tensai
Tevion
Thomson
Thorn
TMK
Tokai
Tonsai
Toshiba
1043
1050
Pye
1042, 1045, 1050
1044, 1048
1043, 1058
1043, 1047
1002, 1014
1045, 1050
1050
1013, 1024, 1029,
1043, 1046, 1066,
1075
Quarter
Quartz
Quasar
Quelle
Radio Shack
Radio Shack/Realistic
1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
1046
1003
Radiola
Radix
Totevision
1002, 1003, 1014
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© 2008
All rights reserved.
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
WN25460
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
HTR-6160
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
■ Front panel
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
A
VOLUME
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
BAND
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SCENE
MEMORY
INFO
1
2
3
4
PROGRAM
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
SYSTEM OFF
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO SELECT
OPTIMIZER MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Remote control
1
POWER POWER
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
H
I
2
3
TV
AV
A
XM
SIRIUS
J
K
CD
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNER
TV CH
DTV/CBL
VCR
DVR
B
4
V-AUX/DOCK
AMP
L
TV VOL
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
5
6
SCENE
1
2
3
4
M
N
O
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND LEVEL
VOLUME
TITLE
7
8
9
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
REC
0
A
INFO
P
Q
R
l
PROG h
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
B
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
C
D
E
F
5
6
7
8
S
t
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENT
9
0
10
G
Printed in Malaysia
WN67540
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|